## Are you sure?

This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?

**Berkeley, California, USA
**

Version 8

January 2002

ETABS

®

Integrated Building Design Software

Concrete Frame Design Manual

Copyright Computers and Structures, Inc., 1978-2002.

The CSI Logo is a trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc.

ETABS is a trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc.

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated

Copyright

The computer program ETABS and all associated documentation are proprietary and

copyrighted products. Worldwide rights of ownership rest with Computers and

Structures, Inc. Unlicensed use of the program or reproduction of the documentation in

any form, without prior written authorization from Computers and Structures, Inc., is

explicitly prohibited.

Further information and copies of this documentation may be obtained from:

Computers and Structures, Inc.

1995 University Avenue

Berkeley, California 94704 USA

Phone: (510) 845-2177

FAX: (510) 845-4096

e-mail: info@csiberkeley.com (for general questions)

e-mail: support@csiberkeley.com (for technical support questions)

web: www.csiberkeley.com

DISCLAIMER

CONSIDERABLE TIME, EFFORT AND EXPENSE HAVE GONE INTO THE

DEVELOPMENT AND DOCUMENTATION OF ETABS. THE PROGRAM HAS

BEEN THOROUGHLY TESTED AND USED. IN USING THE PROGRAM,

HOWEVER, THE USER ACCEPTS AND UNDERSTANDS THAT NO WARRANTY

IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED BY THE DEVELOPERS OR THE DISTRIBUTORS

ON THE ACCURACY OR THE RELIABILITY OF THE PROGRAM.

THIS PROGRAM IS A VERY PRACTICAL TOOL FOR THE DESIGN/CHECK OF

CONCRETE STRUCTURES. HOWEVER, THE USER MUST THOROUGHLY READ

THE MANUAL AND CLEARLY RECOGNIZE THE ASPECTS OF CONCRETE

DESIGN THAT THE PROGRAM ALGORITHMS DO NOT ADDRESS.

THE USER MUST EXPLICITLY UNDERSTAND THE ASSUMPTIONS OF THE

PROGRAM AND MUST INDEPENDENTLY VERIFY THE RESULTS.

i

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN

Contents

General Concrete Frame Design Information

1 General Design Information

Design Codes 1-1

Units 1-1

Overwriting the Frame Design Procedure for a Con-

crete Frame

1-1

Design Load Combinations 1-2

Design of Beams 1-2

Design of Columns 1-3

Beam/Column Flexural Capacity Ratios 1-4

Second Order P-Delta Effects 1-4

Element Unsupported Lengths 1-6

Analysis Sections and Design Sections 1-7

2 Concrete Frame Design Process

Concrete Frame Design Procedure 2-1

3 Interactive Concrete Frame Design

General 3-1

Concrete Design Information Form 3-1

4 Output Data Plotted Directly on the Model

Overview 4-1

Using the Print Design Tables Form 4-1

Design Input 4-2

Design Output 4-2

Concrete Frame Design Manual

ii

Concrete Frame Design Specific to UBC97

5 General and Notation

Introduction to the UBC 97 Series of Technical Notes 5-1

Notation 5-2

6 Preferences

General 6-1

Using the Preferences Form 6-1

Preferences 6-2

7 Overwrites

General 7-1

Overwrites 7-1

Making Changes in the Overwrites Form 7-3

Resetting Concrete Frame Overwrites to Default

Values

7-4

8 Design Load Combinations

9 Strength Reduction Factors

10 Column Design

Overview 10-1

Generation of Biaxial Interaction Surfaces 10-2

Calculate Column Capacity Ratio 10-5

Determine Factored Moments and Forces 10-6

Determine Moment Magnification Factors 10-6

Determine Capacity Ratio 10-8

Required Reinforcing Area 10-10

Design Column Shear Reinforcement 10-10

Determine Required Shear Reinforcement 10-14

Reference 10-15

11 Beam Design

Overview 11-1

Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement 11-1

Determine Factored Moments 11-2

Determine Required Flexural Reinforcement 11-2

Contents

iii

Design Beam Shear Reinforcement 11-10

12 Joint Design

Overview 12-1

Determine the Panel Zone Shear Force 12-1

Determine the Effective Area of Joint 12-5

Check Panel Zone Shear Stress 12-5

Beam/Column Flexural Capacity Ratios 12-6

13 Input Data

Input data 13-1

Using the Print Design Tables Form 13-3

14 Output Details

Using the Print Design Tables Form 14-3

Concrete Frame Design Specific to ACI-318-99

15 General and Notation

Introduction to the ACI318-99 Series of Technical

Notes

15-1

Notation 15-2

16 Preferences

General 16-1

Using the Preferences Form 16-1

Preferences 16-2

17 Overwrites

General 17-1

Overwrites 17-1

Making Changes in the Overwrites Form 17-3

Resetting Concrete Frame Overwrites to Default

Values

17-4

18 Design Load Combinations

19 Strength Reduction Factors

Concrete Frame Design Manual

iv

20 Column Design

Overview 20-1

Generation of Biaxial Interaction Surfaces 20-2

Calculate Column Capacity Ratio 20-5

Determine Factored Moments and Forces 20-6

Determine Moment Magnification Factors 20-6

Determine Capacity Ratio 20-9

Required Reinforcing Area 20-10

Design Column Shear Reinforcement 20-10

Determine Section Forces 20-11

Determine Concrete Shear Capacity 20-12

Determine Required Shear Reinforcement 20-13

References 20-15

21 Beam Design

Overview 21-1

Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement 21-1

Determine Factored Moments 21-2

Determine Required Flexural Reinforcement 21-2

Design for T-Beam 21-5

Minimum Tensile Reinforcement 21-8

Special Consideration for Seismic Design 21-8

Design Beam Shear Reinforcement 21-9

Determine Shear Force and Moment 21-11

Determine Concrete Shear Capacity 21-12

Determine Required Shear Reinforcement 21-13

22 Joint Design

Overview 22-1

Determine the Panel Zone Shear Force 22-1

Determine the Effective Area of Joint 22-4

Check Panel Zone Shear Stress 22-4

Beam/Column Flexural Capacity Ratios 22-6

23 Input Data

Input Data 23-1

Using the Print Design Tables Form 23-3

Contents

v

24 Output Details

Using the Print Design Tables Form 24-3

Design Codes Technical Note 1 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA JANUARY 2002

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN

Technical Note 1

General Design Information

This Technical Note presents some basic information and concepts helpful

when performing concrete frame design using this program.

Design Codes

The design code is set using the Options menu > Preferences > Concrete

Frame Design command. You can choose to design for any one design code

in any one design run. You cannot design some elements for one code and

others for a different code in the same design run. You can, however, perform

different design runs using different design codes without rerunning the

analysis.

Units

For concrete frame design in this program, any set of consistent units can be

used for input. You can change the system of units at any time. Typically, de-

sign codes are based on one specific set of units.

Overwriting the Frame Design Procedure for a Concrete

Frame

The two design procedures possible for concrete beam design are:

Concrete frame design

No design

If a line object is assigned a frame section property that has a concrete ma-

terial property, its default design procedure is Concrete Frame Design. A con-

crete frame element can be switched between the Concrete Frame Design and

the "None" design procedure. Assign a concrete frame element the "None"

design procedure if you do not want it designed by the Concrete Frame De-

sign postprocessor.

General Design Information Concrete Frame Design

Technical Note 1 - 2 Design Load Combinations

Change the default design procedure used for concrete frame elements by

selecting the element(s) and clicking Design menu > Overwrite Frame

Design Procedure. This change is only successful if the design procedure

assigned to an element is valid for that element. For example, if you select a

concrete element and attempt to change the design procedure to Steel Frame

Design, the program will not allow the change because a concrete element

cannot be changed to a steel frame element.

Design Load Combinations

The program creates a number of default design load combinations for con-

crete frame design. You can add in your own design load combinations. You

can also modify or delete the program default load combinations. An unlim-

ited number of design load combinations can be specified.

To define a design load combination, simply specify one or more load cases,

each with its own scale factor. For more information see Concrete Frame De-

sign UBC97 Technical Note 8 Design Load Combination and Concrete Frame

Design ACI 318-99 Technical Note 18 Design Load Combination.

Design of Beams

The program designs all concrete frame elements designated as beam sec-

tions in their Frame Section Properties as beams (see Define menu >Frame

Sections command and click the Reinforcement button). In the design of

concrete beams, in general, the program calculates and reports the required

areas of steel for flexure and shear based on the beam moments, shears, load

combination factors, and other criteria, which are described in detail in Con-

crete Frame UBC97 Technical Note Beam Design 11 and Concrete Frame ACI

318-99 Technical Note 21 Beam Design. The reinforcement requirements are

calculated at each output station along the beam span.

All the beams are designed for major direction flexure and shear only.

Effects resulting from any axial forces, minor direction bending, and

torsion that may exist in the beams must be investigated independ-

ently by the user.

In designing the flexural reinforcement for the major moment at a particular

section of a particular beam, the steps involve the determination of the

maximum factored moments and the determination of the reinforcing steel.

Concrete Frame Design General Design Information

Design of Beams Technical Note 1 - 3

The beam section is designed for the maximum positive and maximum nega-

tive factored moment envelopes obtained from all of the load combinations.

Negative beam moments produce top steel. In such cases, the beam is al-

ways designed as a rectangular section. Positive beam moments produce

bottom steel. In such cases, the beam may be designed as a rectangular- or

T-beam. For the design of flexural reinforcement, the beam is first designed

as a singly reinforced beam. If the beam section is not adequate, the required

compression reinforcement is calculated.

In designing the shear reinforcement for a particular beam for a particular set

of loading combinations at a particular station resulting from the beam major

shear, the steps involve the determination of the factored shear force, the

determination of the shear force that can be resisted by concrete, and the

determination of the reinforcement steel required to carry the balance.

Design of Columns

The program designs all concrete frame elements designated as column sec-

tions in their Frame Section Properties as columns (see Define menu

>Frame Sections command and click the Reinforcement button). In the

design of the columns, the program calculates the required longitudinal steel,

or if the longitudinal steel is specified, the column stress condition is reported

in terms of a column capacity ratio. The capacity ratio is a factor that gives an

indication of the stress condition of the column with respect to the capacity of

the column. The design procedure for reinforced concrete columns involves

the following steps:

Generate axial force-biaxial moment interaction surfaces for all of the dif-

ferent concrete section types of the model.

Check the capacity of each column for the factored axial force and bending

moments obtained from each load combination at each end of the column.

This step is also used to calculate the required reinforcement (if none was

specified) that will produce a capacity ratio of 1.0.

Design the column shear reinforcement.

The shear reinforcement design procedure for columns is very similar to that

for beams, except that the effect of the axial force on the concrete shear ca-

pacity needs to be considered. See Concrete Frame UBC97 Technical Note 10

General Design Information Concrete Frame Design

Technical Note 1 - 4 Second Order P-Delta Effects

Column Design and Concrete Frame ACI 318-99 Technical Note 20 Column

Design for more information.

Beam/Column Flexural Capacity Ratios

When the ACI 318-99 or UBC97 code is selected, the program calculates the

ratio of the sum of the beam moment capacities to the sum of the column

moment capacities at a particular joint for a particular column direction, ma-

jor or minor. The capacities are calculated with no reinforcing overstrength

factor, α, and including ϕ factors. The beam capacities are calculated for re-

versed situations and the maximum summation obtained is used.

The moment capacities of beams that frame into the joint in a direction that is

not parallel to the major or minor direction of the column are resolved along

the direction that is being investigated and the resolved components are

added to the summation.

The column capacity summation includes the column above and the column

below the joint. For each load combination, the axial force, P

u

, in each of the

columns is calculated from the program analysis load combinations. For each

load combination, the moment capacity of each column under the influence of

the corresponding axial load P

u

is then determined separately for the major

and minor directions of the column, using the uniaxial column interaction dia-

gram. The moment capacities of the two columns are added to give the ca-

pacity summation for the corresponding load combination. The maximum ca-

pacity summations obtained from all of the load combinations is used for the

beam/column capacity ratio.

The beam/column flexural capacity ratios are only reported for Special Mo-

ment-Resisting Frames involving seismic design load combinations.

See Beam/Column Flexural Capacity Ratios in Concrete Frame UBC97 Techni-

cal Note 12 Joint Design or in Concrete Frame ACI 318-99 Technical Note 22

Joint Design for more information.

Second Order P-Delta Effects

Typically, design codes require that second order P-Delta effects be consid-

ered when designing concrete frames. The P-Delta effects come from two

sources. They are the global lateral translation of the frame and the local de-

formation of elements within the frame.

Concrete Frame Design General Design Information

Second Order P-Delta Effects Technical Note 1 - 5

Consider the frame element shown in Figure 1, which is extracted from a

story level of a larger structure. The overall global translation of this frame

element is indicated by ∆. The local deformation of the element is shown as δ.

The total second order P-Delta effects on this frame element are those caused

by both ∆ and δ.

The program has an option to consider P-Delta effects in the analysis. Con-

trols for considering this effect are found using the Analyze menu > Set

Analysis Options command and then clicking the Set P-Delta Parameters

button. When you consider P-Delta effects in the analysis, the program does a

good job of capturing the effect due to the ∆ deformation shown in Figure 1,

but it does not typically capture the effect of the δ deformation (unless, in the

model, the frame element is broken into multiple pieces over its length).

In design codes, consideration of the second order P-Delta effects is generally

achieved by computing the flexural design capacity using a formula similar to

that shown in Equation. 1.

M

CAP

= aM

nt

+ bM

lt

Eqn. 1

where,

M

CAP

= Flexural design capacity

∆

δ

Original position of frame

element shown by vertical

line

Position of frame element

as a result of global lateral

translation, ∆, shown by

dashed line

Final deflected position of

frame element that

includes the global lateral

translation, ∆, and the

local deformation of the

element, δ

Figure 1: The Total Second Order P-Delta Effects on a Frame Element

Caused by Both ∆ ∆∆ ∆ and δ δδ δ

General Design Information Concrete Frame Design

Technical Note 1 - 6 Element Unsupported Lengths

M

nt

= Required flexural capacity of the member assuming there is

no translation of the frame (i.e., associated with the δ defor-

mation in Figure 1)

M

lt

= Required flexural capacity of the member as a result of lateral

translation of the frame only (i.e., associated with the ∆ de-

formation in Figure 1)

a = Unitless factor multiplying M

nt

b = Unitless factor multiplying M

lt

(assumed equal to 1 by the

program; see below)

When the program performs concrete frame design, it assumes that the factor

b is equal to 1 and it uses code-specific formulas to calculate the factor a.

That b = 1 assumes that you have considered P-Delta effects in the analysis,

as previously described. Thus, in general, if you are performing concrete

frame design in this program, you should consider P-Delta effects in the

analysis before running the design.

Element Unsupported Lengths

The column unsupported lengths are required to account for column slender-

ness effects. The program automatically determines these unsupported

lengths. They can also be overwritten by the user on an element-by-element

basis, if desired, using the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design >

View/Revise Overwrites command.

There are two unsupported lengths to consider. They are L

33

and L

22,

as

shown in Figure 2. These are the lengths between support points of the ele-

ment in the corresponding directions. The length L

33

corresponds to instability

about the 3-3 axis (major axis), and L

22

corresponds to instability about the

2-2 axis (minor axis). The length L

22

is also used for lateral-torsional buckling

caused by major direction bending (i.e., about the 3-3 axis).

In determining the values for L

22

and L

33

of the elements, the program recog-

nizes various aspects of the structure that have an effect on these lengths,

such as member connectivity, diaphragm constraints and support points. The

program automatically locates the element support points and evaluates the

corresponding unsupported length.

Concrete Frame Design General Design Information

Analysis Sections and Design Sections Technical Note 1 - 7

Figure 2: Major and Minor Axes of Bending

It is possible for the unsupported length of a frame element to be evaluated

by the program as greater than the corresponding element length. For exam-

ple, assume a column has a beam framing into it in one direction, but not the

other, at a floor level. In this case, the column is assumed to be supported in

one direction only at that story level, and its unsupported length in the other

direction will exceed the story height.

Analysis Sections and Design Sections

Analysis sections are those section properties used to analyze the model

when you click the Analyze menu > Run Analysis command. The design

section is whatever section has most currently been designed and thus desig-

nated the current design section.

Tip:

It is important to understand the difference between analysis sections and design sec-

tions.

General Design Information Concrete Frame Design

Technical Note 1 - 8 Analysis Sections and Design Sections

It is possible for the last used analysis section and the current design section

to be different. For example, you may have run your analysis using a W18X35

beam and then found in the design that a W16X31 beam worked. In that

case, the last used analysis section is the W18X35 and the current design

section is the W16X31. Before you complete the design process, verify that

the last used analysis section and the current design section are the same.

The Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Verify Analysis vs De-

sign Section command is useful for this task.

The program keeps track of the analysis section and the design section

separately. Note the following about analysis and design sections:

Assigning a beam a frame section property using the Assign menu >

Frame/Line > Frame Section command assigns the section as both the

analysis section and the design section.

Running an analysis using the Analyze menu > Run Analysis command

(or its associated toolbar button) always sets the analysis section to be the

same as the current design section.

Assigning an auto select list to a frame section using the Assign menu >

Frame/Line > Frame Section command initially sets the design section

to be the beam with the median weight in the auto select list.

Unlocking a model deletes the design results, but it does not delete or

change the design section.

Using the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Select Design

Combo command to change a design load combination deletes the design

results, but it does not delete or change the design section.

Using the Define menu > Load Combinations command to change a de-

sign load combination deletes the design results, but it does not delete or

change the design section.

Using the Options menu > Preferences > Concrete Frame Design

command to change any of the composite beam design preferences deletes

the design results, but it does not delete or change the design section.

Deleting the static nonlinear analysis results also deletes the design results

for any load combination that includes static nonlinear forces. Typically,

Concrete Frame Design General Design Information

Analysis Sections and Design Sections Technical Note 1 - 9

static nonlinear analysis and design results are deleted when one of the

following actions is taken:

9 Use the Define menu > Frame Nonlinear Hinge Properties com-

mand to redefine existing or define new hinges.

9 Use the Define menu > Static Nonlinear/Pushover Cases com-

mand to redefine existing or define new static nonlinear load cases.

9 Use the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Frame Nonlinear Hinges

command to add or delete hinges.

Again, note that these actions delete only results for load combinations that

include static nonlinear forces.

Concrete Frame Design Procedure Technical Note 2 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN

Technical Note 2

Concrete Frame Design Process

This Technical Note describes a basic concrete frame design process using

this program. Although the exact steps you follow may vary, the basic design

process should be similar to that described herein. Other Technical Notes in

the Concrete Frame Design series provide additional information, including

the distinction between analysis sections and design sections (see Analysis

Sections and Design Sections in Concrete Frame Design Technical Note 1

General Design Information).

The concrete frame design postprocessor can design or check concrete col-

umns and can design concrete beams.

Important note: A concrete frame element is designed as a beam or a col-

umn, depending on how its frame section property was designated when it

was defined using the Define menu > Frame Sections command. Note that

when using this command, after you have specified that a section has a con-

crete material property, you can click on the Reinforcement button and

specify whether it is a beam or a column.

Concrete Frame Design Procedure

The following sequence describes a typical concrete frame design process for

a new building. Note that although the sequence of steps you follow may

vary, the basic process probably will be essentially the same.

1. Use the Options menu > Preferences > Concrete Frame Design

command to choose the concrete frame design code and to review other

concrete frame design preferences and revise them if necessary. Note

that default values are provided for all concrete frame design prefer-

ences, so it is unnecessary to define any preferences unless you want to

change some of the default values. See Concrete Frame Design ACI

UBC97 Technical Notes 6 Preferences and Concrete Frame Design ACI

318-99 Technical Notes 16 Preferences for more information.

Concrete Frame Design Process Concrete Frame Design

Technical Note 2 - 2 Concrete Frame Design Procedure

2. Create the building model.

3. Run the building analysis using the Analyze menu > Run Analysis

command.

4. Assign concrete frame overwrites, if needed, using the Design menu >

Concrete Frame Design > View/Revise Overwrites command. Note

that you must select frame elements before using this command. Also

note that default values are provided for all concrete frame design over-

writes, so it is unnecessary to define any overwrites unless you want to

change some of the default values. Note that the overwrites can be as-

signed before or after the analysis is run. See Concrete Frame Design

UBC97 Technical Note 7 Overwrites and Concrete Frame Design ACI

318-99 Technical Note 17 Overwrites for more information.

5. To use any design load combinations other than the defaults created by

the program for your concrete frame design, click the Design menu >

Concrete Frame Design > Select Design Combo command. Note

that you must have already created your own design combos by clicking

the Define menu > Load Combinations command. See Concrete

Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 8 Design Load Combinations and

Concrete Frame Design ACI 318-99 Technical Note 18 Design Load

Combinations for more information.

6. Click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Start De-

sign/Check of Structure command to run the concrete frame design.

7. Review the concrete frame design results by doing one of the following:

a. Click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Display De-

sign Info command to display design input and output information on

the model. See Concrete Frame Design Technical Note 4 Output Data

Plotted Directly on the Model for more information.

b. Right click on a frame element while the design results are displayed

on it to enter the interactive design mode and interactively design the

frame element. Note that while you are in this mode, you can revise

overwrites and immediately see the results of the new design. See

Concrete Frame Design Technical Note 3 Interactive Concrete Frame

Design for more information.

Concrete Frame Design Concrete Frame Design Process

Concrete Frame Design Procedure Technical Note 2 - 3

If design results are not currently displayed (and the design has been

run), click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Interac-

tive Concrete Frame Design command and then right click a frame

element to enter the interactive design mode for that element.

8. Use the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design com-

mand to print concrete frame design data. If you select frame elements

before using this command, data is printed only for the selected ele-

ments. See Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 14 Output

Details and Concrete Frame Design ACI 318-99 Technical Note 24 Out-

put Details for more information.

9. Use the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Change Design

Section command to change the design section properties for selected

frame elements.

10. Click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Start De-

sign/Check of Structure command to rerun the concrete frame design

with the new section properties. Review the results using the procedures

described in Item 7.

11. Rerun the building analysis using the Analyze menu > Run Analysis

command. Note that the section properties used for the analysis are the

last specified design section properties.

12. Click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Start De-

sign/Check of Structure command to rerun the concrete frame design

with the new analysis results and new section properties. Review the re-

sults using the procedures described above.

13. Again use the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Change

Design Section command to change the design section properties for

selected frame elements, if necessary.

14. Repeat the processes in steps 10, 11 and 12 as many times as neces-

sary.

15. Rerun the building analysis using the Analyze menu > Run Analysis

command. Note that the section properties used for the analysis are the

last specified design section properties.

Concrete Frame Design Process Concrete Frame Design

Technical Note 2 - 4 Concrete Frame Design Procedure

Note:

Concrete frame design is an iterative process. Typically, the analysis and design will be

rerun multiple times to complete a design.

16. Click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Start De-

sign/Check of Structure command to rerun the concrete frame design

with the new section properties. Review the results using the procedures

described in Item 7.

17. Click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Verify Analysis

vs Design Section command to verify that all of the final design sec-

tions are the same as the last used analysis sections.

18. Use the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design com-

mand to print selected concrete frame design results, if desired.

It is important to note that design is an iterative process. The sections used in

the original analysis are not typically the same as those obtained at the end

of the design process. Always run the building analysis using the final frame

section sizes and then run a design check using the forces obtained from that

analysis. Use the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Verify

Analysis vs Design Section command to verify that the design sections are

the same as the analysis sections.

General Technical Note 3 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN

Technical Note 3

Interactive Concrete Frame Design

This Technical Note describes interactive concrete frame design and review,

which is a powerful mode that allows the user to review the design results for

any concrete frame design and interactively revise the design assumptions

and immediately review the revised results.

General

Note that a design must have been run for the interactive design mode to be

available. To run a design, click the Design menu > Concrete Frame De-

sign > Start Design/Check of Structure command.

Right click on a frame element while the design results are displayed on it to

enter the interactive design mode and interactively design the element in the

Concrete Design Information form. If design results are not currently dis-

played (and a design has been run), click the Design menu > Concrete

Frame Design > Interactive Concrete Frame Design command and then

right click a frame element to enter the interactive design mode for that ele-

ment.

Important note: A concrete frame element is designed as a beam or a col-

umn, depending on how its frame section property was designated when it

was defined using the Define menu > Frame Sections command and the

Reinforcement button, which is only available if it is a concrete section.

Concrete Design Information Form

Table 1 describe the features that are included in the Concrete Design Infor-

mation form.

Interactive Concrete Frame Design Concrete Frame Design

Technical Note 3 - 2 Table 1 Concrete Design Information Form

Table 1 Concrete Design Information Form

Item DESCRIPTION

Story This is the story level ID associated with the frame element.

Beam This is the label associated with a frame element that has been

assigned a concrete frame section property that is designated

as a beam. See the important note previously in this Technical

Note for more information.

Column This is the label associated with a frame element that has been

assigned a concrete frame section property that is designated

as a column. See the important note previously in this Techni-

cal Note for more information.

Section Name This is the label associated with a frame element that has been

assigned a concrete frame section property.

Reinforcement Information

The reinforcement information table on the Concrete Design Information form shows the

output information obtained for each design load combination at each output station

along the frame element. For columns that are designed by this program, the item with

the largest required amount of longitudinal reinforcing is initially highlighted. For columns

that are checked by this program, the item with the largest capacity ratio is initially high-

lighted. For beams, the item with the largest required amount of bottom steel is initially

highlighted. Following are the possible headings in the table:

Combo ID This is the name of the design load combination considered.

Station location This is the location of the station considered, measured from

the i-end of the frame element.

Longitudinal

reinforcement

This item applies to columns only. It also only applies to col-

umns for which the program designs the longitudinal reinforc-

ing. It is the total required area of longitudinal reinforcing steel.

Capacity ratio This item applies to columns only. It also only applies to col-

umns for which you have specified the location and size of re-

inforcing bars and thus the program checks the design. This

item is the capacity ratio.

Concrete Frame Design Interactive Concrete Frame Design

Table 1 Concrete Design Information Form Technical Note 3 - 3

Table 1 Concrete Design Information Form

Item DESCRIPTION

The capacity ratio is determined by first extending a line from

the origin of the PMM interaction surface to the point repre-

senting the P, M2 and M3 values for the designated load com-

bination. Assume the length of this first line is designated L1.

Next, a second line is extended from the origin of the PMM in-

teraction surface through the point representing the P, M2 and

M3 values for the designated load combination until it intersects

the interaction surface. Assume the length of this line from the

origin to the interaction surface is designated L2. The capacity

ratio is equal to L1/L2.

Major shear

reinforcement

This item applies to columns only. It is the total required area of

shear reinforcing per unit length for shear acting in the column

major direction.

Minor shear

reinforcement

This item applies to columns only. It is the total required area of

shear reinforcing per unit length for shear acting in the column

minor direction.

Top steel This item applies to beams only. It is the total required area of

longitudinal top steel at the specified station.

Bottom steel This item applies to beams only. It is the total required area of

longitudinal bottom steel at the specified station.

Shear steel This item applies to beams only. It is the total required area of

shear reinforcing per unit length at the specified station for

loads acting in the local 2-axis direction of the beam.

Overwrites Button Click this button to access and make revisions to the concrete

frame overwrites and then immediately see the new design re-

sults. If you modify some overwrites in this mode and you exit

both the Concrete Frame Design Overwrites form and the Con-

crete Design Information form by clicking their respective OK

buttons, the changes to the overwrites are saved permanently.

When you exit the Concrete Frame Design Overwrites form by

clicking the OK button the changes are temporarily saved. If

you then exit the Concrete Design Information form by clicking

the Cancel button the changes you made to the concrete frame

overwrites are considered temporary only and are not perma-

nently saved. Permanent saving of the overwrites does not ac-

tually occur until you click the OK button in the Concrete Design

Information form as well as the Concrete Frame Design Over-

writes form.

Interactive Concrete Frame Design Concrete Frame Design

Technical Note 3 - 4 Table 1 Concrete Design Information Form

Table 1 Concrete Design Information Form

Item DESCRIPTION

Details Button

Clicking this button displays design details for the frame ele-

ment. Print this information by selecting Print from the File

menu that appears at the top of the window displaying the de-

sign details.

Interaction Button Clicking this button displays the biaxial interaction curve for the

concrete section at the location in the element that is high-

lighted in the table.

Overview Technical Note 4 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN

Technical Note 4

Output Data Plotted Directly on the Model

This Technical Note describes the input and output data that can be plotted

directly on the model.

Overview

Use the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Display Design Info

command to display on-screen output plotted directly on the program model.

If desired, the screen graphics can then be printed using the File menu >

Print Graphics command. The on-screen display data presents input and

output data.

Using the Print Design Tables Form

To print the concrete frame input summary directly to a printer, use the File

menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design command and click the

check box on the Print Design Tables form. Click the OK button to send the

print to your printer. Click the Cancel button rather than the OK button to

cancel the print. Use the File menu > Print Setup command and the

Setup>> button to change printers, if necessary.

To print the concrete frame input summary to a file, click the Print to File

check box on the Print Design Tables form. Click the Filename>> button to

change the path or filename. Use the appropriate file extension for the de-

sired format (e.g., .txt, .xls, .doc). Click the OK buttons on the Open File for

Printing Tables form and the Print Design Tables form to complete the re-

quest.

Note:

The File menu > Display Input/Output Text Files command is useful for displaying out-

put that is printed to a text file.

The Append check box allows you to add data to an existing file. The path and

filename of the current file is displayed in the box near the bottom of the Print

Design Tables form. Data will be added to this file. Or use the Filename

Output Data Plotted Directly on the Model Concrete Frame Design

Technical Note 4 - 2 Design Input

button to locate another file, and when the Open File for Printing Tables cau-

tion box appears, click Yes to replace the existing file.

If you select a specific concrete frame element(s) before using the File menu

> Print Tables > concrete Frame Design command, the Selection Only

check box will be checked. The print will be for the selected steel frame ele-

ment(s) only.

Design Input

The following types of data can be displayed directly on the model by select-

ing the data type (shown in bold type) from the drop-down list on the Display

Design Results form. Display this form by selecting he Design menu > Con-

crete Frame Design > Display Design Info command.

Design Sections

Design Type

Live Load Red Factors

Unbraced L_Ratios

Eff Length K-Factors

Cm Factors

DNS Factors

DS Factors

Each of these items is described in the code-specific Concrete Frame Design

UBC97 Technical Note 13 Input Data and Concrete Frame Design ACI 318-99

Technical Note 23 Input Data.

Design Output

The following types of data can be displayed directly on the model by select-

ing the data type (shown in bold type) from the drop-down list on the Display

Design Results form. Display this form by selecting he Design menu > Con-

crete Frame Design > Display Design Info command.

Concrete Frame Design Output Data Plotted Directly on the Model

Design Output Technical Note 4 - 3

Longitudinal Reinforcing

Shear Reinforcing

Column Capacity Ratios

Joint Shear Capacity Ratios

Beam/Column Capacity Ratios

Each of these items is described in the code-specific Concrete Frame Design

ACI 318-99 Technical Note 24 Output Details and Concrete Frame Design

UBC97 Technical Note 14 Output Details.

General and Notation Technical Note 5 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN UBC97

Technical Note 5

General and Notation

Introduction to the UBC97 Series of Technical Notes

The Concrete Frame Design UBC97 series of Technical Notes describes in de-

tail the various aspects of the concrete design procedure that is used by this

program when the user selects the UBC97 Design Code (ICBO 1997). The

various notations used in this series are listed herein.

The design is based on user-specified loading combinations. The program

provides a set of default load combinations that should satisfy requirements

for the design of most building type structures. See Concrete Frame Design

UBC97 Technical Note 8 Design Load Combinations for more information.

When using the UBC 97 option, a frame is assigned to one of the following

five Seismic Zones (UBC 2213, 2214):

Zone 0

Zone 1

Zone 2

Zone 3

Zone 4

By default the Seismic Zone is taken as Zone 4 in the program. However, the

Seismic Zone can be overwritten in the Preference form to change the de-

fault. See Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 6 Preferences for

more information.

When using the UBC 97 option, the following Framing Systems are recognized

and designed according to the UBC design provisions (UBC 1627, 1921):

Ordinary Moment-Resisting Frame (OMF)

General and Notation Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 5 - 2 General and Notation

Intermediate Moment-Resisting Frame (IMRF)

Special Moment-Resisting Frame (SMRF)

The Ordinary Moment-Resisting Frame (OMF) is appropriate in minimal seis-

mic risk areas, especially in Seismic Zones 0 and 1. The Intermediate Mo-

ment-Resisting Frame (IMRF) is appropriate in moderate seismic risk areas,

specially in Seismic Zone 2. The Special Moment-Resisting Frame (SMRF) is

appropriate in high seismic risk areas, specially in Seismic Zones 3 and 4. The

UBC seismic design provisions are considered in the program. The details of

the design criteria used for the different framing systems are described in

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 9 Strength Reduction Factors,

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 10 Column Design, Concrete

Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 11 Beam Design, and Concrete Frame

Design UBC97 Technical Note 12 Joint Design.

By default the frame type is taken in the program as OMRF in Seismic Zone 0

and 1, as IMRF in Seismic Zone 2, and as SMRF in Seismic Zone 3 and 4.

However, the frame type can be overwritten in the Overwrites form on a

member-by-member basis. See Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note

7 Overwrites for more information. If any member is assigned with a frame

type, the change of the Seismic Zone in the Preferences will not modify the

frame type of an individual member that has been assigned a frame type.

The program also provides input and output data summaries, which are de-

scribed in Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 13 Input Data and

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 14 Output Details.

English as well as SI and MKS metric units can be used for input. The code is

based on Inch-Pound-Second units. For simplicity, all equations and descrip-

tions presented in this Technical Note correspond to Inch-Pound-Second

units unless otherwise noted.

Notation

A

cv

Area of concrete used to determine shear stress, sq-in

A

g

Gross area of concrete, sq-in

A

s

Area of tension reinforcement, sq-in

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 General and Notation

General and Notation Technical Note 5 - 3

'

s

A

Area of compression reinforcement, sq-in

A

s(required)

Area of steel required for tension reinforcement, sq-in

A

st

Total area of column longitudinal reinforcement, sq-in

A

v

Area of shear reinforcement, sq-in

C

m

Coefficient, dependent upon column curvature, used to calculate

moment magnification factor

D' Diameter of hoop, in

E

c

Modulus of elasticity of concrete, psi

E

s

Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, assumed as 29,000,000 psi

(UBC 1980.5.2)

I

g

Moment of inertia of gross concrete section about centroidal axis,

neglecting reinforcement, in

4

I

se

Moment of inertia of reinforcement about centroidal axis of mem-

ber cross section, in

4

L Clear unsupported length, in

M

1

Smaller factored end moment in a column, lb-in

M

2

Larger factored end moment in a column, lb-in

M

c

Factored moment to be used in design, lb-in

M

ns

Nonsway component of factored end moment, lb-in

M

s

Sway component of factored end moment, lb-in

M

u

Factored moment at section, lb-in

M

ux

Factored moment at section about X-axis, lb-in

M

uy

Factored moment at section about Y-axis, lb-in

P

b

Axial load capacity at balanced strain conditions, lb

General and Notation Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 5 - 4 General and Notation

P

c

Critical buckling strength of column, lb

P

max

Maximum axial load strength allowed, lb

P

0

Acial load capacity at zero eccentricity, lb

P

u

Factored axial load at section, lb

V

c

Shear resisted by concrete, lb

V

E

Shear force caused by earthquake loads, lb

V

D+L

Shear force from span loading, lb

V

u

Factored shear force at a section, lb

V

p

Shear force computed from probable moment capacity, lb

a Depth of compression block, in

a

b

Depth of compression block at balanced condition, in

b Width of member, in

b

f

Effective width of flange (T-Beam section), in

b

w

Width of web (T-Beam section), in

c Depth to neutral axis, in

c

b

Depth to neutral axis at balanced conditions, in

d Distance from compression face to tension reinforcement, in

d' Concrete cover to center of reinforcing, in

d

s

Thickness of slab (T-Beam section), in

'

c

f

Specified compressive strength of concrete, psi

f

y

Specified yield strength of flexural reinforcement, psi

f

y

≤ 80,000 psi (UBC 1909.4)

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 General and Notation

General and Notation Technical Note 5 - 5

f

ys

Specified yield strength of flexural reinforcement, psi

h Dimension of column, in

k Effective length factor

r Radius of gyration of column section, in

α Reinforcing steel overstrength factor

β

1

Factor for obtaining depth of compression block in concrete

β

d

Absolute value of ratio of maximum factored axial dead load to

maximum factored axial total load

δ

s

Moment magnification factor for sway moments

δ

ns

Moment magnification factor for nonsway moments

ε

c

Strain in concrete

ε

s

Strain in reinforcing steel

ϕ Strength reduction factor

General Technical Note 6 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN UBC97

Technical Note 6

Preferences

This Technical Note describes the items in the Preferences form.

General

The concrete frame design preferences in this program are basic assignments

that apply to all concrete frame elements. Use the Options menu > Prefer-

ences > Concrete Frame Design command to access the Preferences form

where you can view and revise the concrete frame design preferences.

Default values are provided for all concrete frame design preference items.

Thus, it is not required that you specify or change any of the preferences. You

should, however, at least review the default values for the preference items

to make sure they are acceptable to you.

Using the Preferences Form

To view preferences, select the Options menu > Preferences > Concrete

Frame Design. The Preferences form will display. The preference options

are displayed in a two-column spreadsheet. The left column of the spread-

sheet displays the preference item name. The right column of the spreadsheet

displays the preference item value.

To change a preference item, left click the desired preference item in either

the left or right column of the spreadsheet. This activates a drop-down box or

highlights the current preference value. If the drop-down box appears, select

a new value. If the cell is highlighted, type in the desired value. The prefer-

ence value will update accordingly. You cannot overwrite values in the drop-

down boxes.

When you have finished making changes to the concrete frame preferences,

click the OK button to close the form. You must click the OK button for the

changes to be accepted by the program. If you click the Cancel button to exit

Preferences Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 6 - 2 Preferences

the form, any changes made to the preferences are ignored and the form is

closed.

Preferences

For purposes of explanation in this Technical Note, the preference items are

presented in Table 1. The column headings in the table are described as fol-

lows:

Item: The name of the preference item as it appears in the cells at the

left side of the Preferences form.

Possible Values: The possible values that the associated preference item

can have.

Default Value: The built-in default value that the program assumes for

the associated preference item.

Description: A description of the associated preference item.

Table 1: Concrete Frame Preferences

Item

Possible

Values

Default

Value Description

Design Code Any code in

the program

UBC97 Design code used for design of

concrete frame elements.

Phi Bending

Tension

>0 0.9 Unitless strength reduction factor per

UBC 1909.

Phi Compres-

sion Tied

>0 0.7 Unitless strength reduction factor per

UBC 1909.

Phi Compres-

sion Spiral

>0 0.75 Unitless strength reduction factor per

UBC 1909.

Phi Shear >0 0.85 Unitless strength reduction factor per

UBC 1909.

Number Inter-

action Curves

≥4.0 24 Number of equally spaced interaction

curves used to create a full 360-degree

interaction surface (this item should be

a multiple of four). We recommend that

you use 24 for this item.

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Preferences

Preferences Technical Note 6 - 3

Table 1: Concrete Frame Preferences

Item

Possible

Values

Default

Value Description

Number Inter-

action Points

Any odd value

≥1.0

11 Number of points used for defining a

single curve in a concrete frame

interaction surface (this item should be

odd).

Time History

Design

Envelopes or

Step-by-Step

Envelopes Toggle for design load combinations

that include a time history designed for

the envelope of the time history, or

designed step-by-step for the entire

time history. If a single design load

combination has more than one time

history case in it, that design load

combination is designed for the

envelopes of the time histories,

regardless of what is specified here.

Overwrites Technical Note 7 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN UBC97

Technical Note 7

Overwrites

General

The concrete frame design overwrites are basic assignments that apply only

to those elements to which they are assigned. This Technical Note describes

concrete frame design overwrites for UBC97. To access the overwrites, select

an element and click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design >

View/Revise Overwrites command.

Default values are provided for all overwrite items. Thus, you do not need to

specify or change any of the overwrites. However, at least review the default

values for the overwrite items to make sure they are acceptable. When

changes are made to overwrite items, the program applies the changes only

to the elements to which they are specifically assigned; that is, to the ele-

ments that are selected when the overwrites are changed.

Overwrites

For explanation purposes in this Technical Note, the overwrites are presented

in Table 1. The column headings in the table are described as follows.

Item: The name of the overwrite item as it appears in the program. To

save space in the formes, these names are generally short.

Possible Values: The possible values that the associated overwrite item

can have.

Default Value: The default value that the program assumes for the asso-

ciated overwrite item.

Description: A description of the associated overwrite item.

An explanation of how to change an overwrite is provided at the end of this

Technical Note.

Overwrites Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 7 - 2 Overwrites

Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Overwrites

Item

Possible

Values

Default

Value Description

Element

Section

Element

Type

Sway Special,

Sway Interme-

diate,

Sway

Ordinary

NonSway

Sway Special Frame type; see UBC 1910.11 to

1910.13.

Live Load

Reduction

Factor

>0

≤1.0

1. Used to reduce the live load contribu-

tion to the factored loading.

Horizontal

Earthquake

Factor

>0

≤1.0

1.

Unbraced

Length Ratio

(Major)

>0

≤1.0

1.0

Unbraced

Length Ratio

(Minor)

>0

≤1.0

1.0

Effective

Length Factor

(K Major)

>0

≤1.0

1 See UBC 1910.12.1.

Effective

Length Factor

(K Minor)

>0

≤1.0

1 See UBC 1910.12.1.

Moment

Coefficient

(Cm Major)

>0

≤1.0

1 See UBC 1910.12.3.1 relates actual

moment diagram to an equivalent uni-

form moment diagram.

Moment

Coefficient

(Cm Minor)

>0

≤1.0

1 See UBC 1910.12.3.1 relates actual

moment diagram to an equivalent uni-

form moment diagram.

NonSway

Moment Factor

(Dns Major)

>0

≤1.0

1 See UBC 1910.12.

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Overwrites

Overwrites Technical Note 7 - 3

Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Overwrites

Item

Possible

Values

Default

Value Description

NonSway

Moment Factor

(Dns Minor)

1 See UBC 1910.12.

Sway Moment

Factor

(Ds Major)

1 See UBC 1910.12.

Sway Moment

Factor

(Ds Minor)

1 See UBC 1910.12.

Making Changes in the Overwrites Form

To access the concrete frame overwrites, select an element and click the De-

sign menu > Concrete Frame Design > View/Revise Overwrites com-

mand.

The overwrites are displayed in the form with a column of check boxes and a

two-column spreadsheet. The left column of the spreadsheet contains the

name of the overwrite item. The right column of the spreadsheet contains the

overwrites values.

Initially, the check boxes in the Concrete Frame Design Overwrites form are

all unchecked and all of the cells in the spreadsheet have a gray background

to indicate that they are inactive and the items in the cells cannot be

changed. The names of the overwrite items are displayed in the first column

of the spreadsheet. The values of the overwrite items are visible in the second

column of the spreadsheet if only one element was selected before the over-

writes form was accessed. If multiple elements were selected, no values show

for the overwrite items in the second column of the spreadsheet.

After selecting one or multiple elements, check the box to the left of an over-

write item to change it. Then left click in either column of the spreadsheet to

activate a drop-down box or highlight the contents in the cell in the right col-

umn of the spreadsheet. If the drop-down box appears, select a value from

Overwrites Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 7 - 4 Overwrites

the box. If the cell contents is highlighted, type in the desired value. The

overwrite will reflect the change. You cannot change the values of the drop-

down boxes.

When changes to the overwrites have been completed, click the OK button to

close the form. The program then changes all of the overwrite items whose

associated check boxes are checked for the selected members. You must click

the OK button for the changes to be accepted by the program. If you click the

Cancel button to exit the form, any changes made to the overwrites are ig-

nored and the form is closed.

Resetting Concrete Frame Overwrites to Default Values

Use the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Reset All Overwrites

command to reset all of the steel frame overwrites. All current design results

will be deleted when this command is executed.

Important note about resetting overwrites: The program defaults for the

overwrite items are built into the program. The concrete frame overwrite val-

ues that were in a .edb file that you used to initialize your model may be dif-

ferent from the built-in program default values. When you reset overwrites,

the program resets the overwrite values to its built-in values, not to the val-

ues that were in the .edb file used to initialize the model.

Design Load Combinations Technical Note 8 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN UBC97

Technical Note 8

Design Load Combinations

The design load combinations are the various combinations of the prescribed

load cases for which the structure needs to be checked. For the UBC 97 code,

if a structure is subjected to dead load (DL) and live load (LL) only, the stress

check may need only one load combination, namely 1.4 DL + 1.7 LL (UBC

1909.2.1). However, in addition to the dead and live loads, if the structure is

subjected to wind (WL) and earthquake (EL) loads, and considering that wind

and earthquake forces are reversible, the following load combinations may

need to be considered (UBC 1909.2).

1.4 DL (UBC 1909.2.1)

1.4 DL + 1.7 LL (UBC 1909.2.1)

0.9 DL ± 1.3 WL (UBC 1909.2.2)

0.75 (1.4 DL + 1.7 LL ± 1.7 WL) (UBC 1909.2.2)

0.9 DL ± 1.0 EL (UBC 1909.2.3, 1612.2.1)

1.2 DL + 0.5 LL ± 1.0 EL) (UBC 1909.2.3, 1612.2.1)

These are also the default design load combinations in the program whenever

the UBC97 code is used.

Live load reduction factors can be applied to the member forces of the live

load condition on an element-by-element basis to reduce the contribution of

the live load to the factored loading. See Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 7 Overwrites for more information.

Strength Reduction Factors Technical Note 9 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN UBC97

Technical Note 9

Strength Reduction Factors

The strength reduction factors, ϕ, are applied on the nominal strength to ob-

tain the design strength provided by a member. The ϕ factors for flexure, ax-

ial force, shear, and torsion are as follows:

ϕ = 0.90 for flexure (UBC 1909.3.2.1)

ϕ = 0.90 for axial tension (UBC 1909.3.2.2)

ϕ = 0.90 for axial tension and flexure (UBC 1909.3.2.2)

ϕ = 0.75 for axial compression, and axial compression

and flexure (spirally reinforced column) (UBC 1909.3.2.2)

ϕ = 0.70 for axial compression, and axial compression

and flexure (tied column) (UBC 1909.3.2.2)

ϕ = 0.85 for shear and torsion (non-seismic design) (UBC 1909.3.2.3)

ϕ = 0.60 for shear and torsion (UBC 1909.3.2.3)

Overview Technical Note 10 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN UBC97

Technical Note 10

Column Design

This Technical Note describes how the program checks column capacity or de-

signs reinforced concrete columns when the UBC97 code is selected.

Overview

The program can be used to check column capacity or to design columns. If

you define the geometry of the reinforcing bar configuration of each concrete

column section, the program will check the column capacity. Alternatively, the

program can calculate the amount of reinforcing required to design the col-

umn. The design procedure for the reinforced concrete columns of the struc-

ture involves the following steps:

Generate axial force/biaxial moment interaction surfaces for all of the dif-

ferent concrete section types of the model. A typical biaxial interaction

surface is shown in Figure 1. When the steel is undefined, the program

generates the interaction surfaces for the range of allowable reinforce-

ment1 to 8 percent for Ordinary and Intermediate moment resisting

frames (UBC 1910.9.1) and 1 to 6 percent for Special moment resisting

frames (UBC 1921.4.3.1).

Calculate the capacity ratio or the required reinforcing area for the fac-

tored axial force and biaxial (or uniaxial) bending moments obtained from

each loading combination at each station of the column. The target capac-

ity ratio is taken as 1 when calculating the required reinforcing area.

Design the column shear reinforcement.

The following four subsections describe in detail the algorithms associated

with this process.

Column Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 10 - 2 Generation of Biaxial Interaction Surfaces

Figure 1 A Typical Column Interaction Surface

Generation of Biaxial Interaction Surfaces

The column capacity interaction volume is numerically described by a series

of discrete points that are generated on the three-dimensional interaction

failure surface. In addition to axial compression and biaxial bending, the for-

mulation allows for axial tension and biaxial bending considerations. A typical

interaction diagram is shown in Figure 1.

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Column Design

Generation of Biaxial Interaction Surfaces Technical Note 10 - 3

The coordinates of these points are determined by rotating a plane of linear

strain in three dimensions on the section of the column. See Figure 2. The

linear strain diagram limits the maximum concrete strain, ε

c

, at the extremity

of the section, to 0.003 (UBC 1910.2.3).

The formulation is based consistently upon the general principles of ultimate

strength design (UBC 1910.3), and allows for any doubly symmetric rectan-

gular, square, or circular column section.

The stress in the steel is given by the product of the steel strain and the steel

modulus of elasticity, ε

s

E

s

, and is limited to the yield stress of the steel, f

y

(UBC 1910.2.4). The area associated with each reinforcing bar is assumed to

be placed at the actual location of the center of the bar and the algorithm

does not assume any further simplifications with respect to distributing the

area of steel over the cross section of the column, such as an equivalent steel

tube or cylinder. See Figure 3.

The concrete compression stress block is assumed to be rectangular, with a

stress value of 0.85

'

c

f (UBC 1910.2.7.1). See Figure 3. The interaction algo-

rithm provides correction to account for the concrete area that is displaced by

the reinforcement in the compression zone.

The effects of the strength reduction factor, ϕ, are included in the generation

of the interaction surfaces. The maximum compressive axial load is limited to

ϕP

n(max)

, where

ϕP

n(max)

= 0.85ϕ[0.85

'

c

f (A

g

-A

st

)+f

y

A

st

] (spiral) (UBC 1910.3.5.1)

ϕP

n(max)

= 0.85ϕ[0.85

'

c

f (A

g

-A

st

)+f

y

A

st

] (tied) (UBC 1910.3.5.2)

ϕ = 0.70 for tied columns (UBC 1909.3.2.2)

ϕ = 0.75 for spirally reinforced columns (UBC 1909.3.2.2)

The value of ϕ used in the interaction diagram varies from ϕ

min

to 0.9 based

on the axial load. For low values of axial load, ϕ is increased linearly from ϕ

min

to 0.9 as the nominal capacity ϕP

n

decreases from the smaller of ϕP

b

or

0.1

'

c

f A

g

to zero, where P

b

is the axial force at the balanced condition. In

cases involving axial tension, ϕ is always 0.9 (UBC 1909.3.2.2).

Column Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 10 - 4 Generation of Biaxial Interaction Surfaces

Figure 2 Idealized Strain Distribution for Generation of Interaction Surfaces

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Column Design

Calculate Column Capacity Ratio Technical Note 10 - 5

Figure 3 Idealization of Stress and Strain Distribution in a Column Section

Calculate Column Capacity Ratio

The column capacity ratio is calculated for each loading combination at each

output station of each column. The following steps are involved in calculating

the capacity ratio of a particular column for a particular loading combination

at a particular location:

Determine the factored moments and forces from the analysis load cases

and the specified load combination factors to give P

u

, M

ux

, and M

uy

.

Determine the moment magnification factors for the column moments.

Apply the moment magnification factors to the factored moments. Deter-

mine whether the point, defined by the resulting axial load and biaxial

moment set, lies within the interaction volume.

The factored moments and corresponding magnification factors depend on the

identification of the individual column as either “sway” or “non-sway.”

Column Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 10 - 6 Calculate Column Capacity Ratio

The following three sections describe in detail the algorithms associated with

this process.

Determine Factored Moments and Forces

The factored loads for a particular load combination are obtained by applying

the corresponding load factors to all the load cases, giving P

u

, M

ux

, and M

uy

.

The factored moments are further increased for non-sway columns, if re-

quired, to obtain minimum eccentricities of (0.6 + 0.03h) inches, where h is

the dimension of the column in the corresponding direction (UBC

1910.12.3.2).

Determine Moment Magnification Factors

The moment magnification factors are calculated separately for sway (overall

stability effect), δ

s

, and for non-sway (individual column stability effect), δ

ns

.

Also the moment magnification factors in the major and minor directions are

in general different.

The program assumes that it performs a P-delta analysis and, therefore, mo-

ment magnification factors for moments causing sidesway are taken as unity

(UBC 1910.10.2). For the P-delta analysis, the load should correspond to a

load combination of 0.75 (1.4 dead load + 1.7 live load)/ϕ if wind load gov-

erns, or (1.2 dead load + 0.50 live load)/ϕ if seismic load governs, where ϕ is

the understrength factor for stability, which is taken as 0.75 (UBC

1910.12.3). See also White and Hajjar (1991).

The moment obtained from analysis is separated into two components: the

sway (M

s

) and the non-sway (M

s

) components. The non-sway components

which are identified by “ns” subscripts are predominantly caused by gravity

load. The sway components are identified by the “s” subscripts. The sway

moments are predominantly caused by lateral loads, and are related to the

cause of side-sway.

For individual columns or column-members in a floor, the magnified moments

about two axes at any station of a column can be obtained as

M = M

ns

+ δ

s

M

s

. (UBC 1910.13.3)

The factor δ

s

is the moment magnification factor for moments causing side

sway. The moment magnification factors for sway moments, δ

s

, is taken as 1

because the component moments M

s

and M

ns

are obtained from a “second or-

der elastic (P-delta) analysis.”

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Column Design

Calculate Column Capacity Ratio Technical Note 10 - 7

The computed moments are further amplified for individual column stability

effect (UBC 1910.12.3, 1910.13.5) by the nonsway moment magnification

factor, δ

ns

, as follows:

M

c

= δ

ns

M

2

, where (UBC 1910.12.3)

M

c

is the factored moment to be used in design, and

M

2

is the larger factored and amplified end moment.

The non-sway moment magnification factor, δ

ns

, associated with the major or

minor direction of the column is given by (UBC 1910.12.3)

δ

ns

=

c

u

m

P

P

C

75 . 0

1 −

≥ 1.0, where (UBC 1910.12.3)

P

c

=

2

2

) (

u

kl

EI π

, (UBC 1910.12.3)

k is conservatively taken as 1; however, the program allows the user to

override this value.

EI is associated with a particular column direction given by:

EI =

d

g c

I E

β + 1

4 . 0

, (UBC 1910.12.3)

maximum factored axial dead load

β

d

= maximum factored axial total load and (UBC 1910.12.3)

C

m

= 0.6 + 0.4

b

a

M

M

≥ 0.4. (UBC 1910.12.3.1)

M

a

and M

b

are the moments at the ends of the column, and M

b

is numerically

larger than M

a

. M

a

/ M

b

is positive for single curvature bending and negative

for double curvature bending. The above expression of C

m

is valid if there is

no transverse load applied between the supports. If transverse load is present

on the span, or the length is overwritten, C

m

= 1. C

m

can be overwritten by

the user on an element-by-element basis.

Column Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 10 - 8 Calculate Column Capacity Ratio

The magnification factor, δ

ns

, must be a positive number and greater than 1.

Therefore, P

u

must be less than 0.75P

c

. If P

u

is found to be greater than or

equal to 0.75P

c

, a failure condition is declared.

The above calculations use the unsupported length of the column. The two

unsupported lengths are l

22

and l

33

, corresponding to instability in the minor

and major directions of the element, respectively. See Figure 4. These are the

lengths between the support points of the element in the corresponding di-

rections.

Figure 4 Axes of Bending and Unsupported Length

If the program assumptions are not satisfactory for a particular member, the

user can explicitly specify values of δ

s

and δ

ns

.

Determine Capacity Ratio

The program calculates a capacity ratio as a measure of the stress condition

of the column. The capacity ratio is basically a factor that gives an indication

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Column Design

Calculate Column Capacity Ratio Technical Note 10 - 9

of the stress condition of the column with respect to the capacity of the col-

umn.

Before entering the interaction diagram to check the column capacity, the

moment magnification factors are applied to the factored loads to obtain P

u

,

M

ux

, and M

uy

. The point (P

u

, M

ux

, M

uy

.) is then placed in the interaction space

shown as point L in Figure 5. If the point lies within the interaction volume,

the column capacity is adequate; however, if the point lies outside the inter-

action volume, the column is overstressed.

Figure 5 Geometric Representation of Column Capacity Ratios

This capacity ratio is achieved by plotting the point L and determining the lo-

cation of point C. The point C is defined as the point where the line OL (if

extended outwards) will intersect the failure surface. This point is determined

by three-dimensional linear interpolation between the points that define the

Column Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 10 - 10 Required Reinforcing Area

failure surface. See Figure 5. The capacity ratio, CR, is given by the ratio

OC

OL

.

If OL = OC (or CR=1), the point lies on the interaction surface and the

column is stressed to capacity.

If OL < OC (or CR<1), the point lies within the interaction volume and the

column capacity is adequate.

If OL > OC (or CR>1), the point lies outside the interaction volume and the

column is overstressed.

The maximum of all the values of CR calculated from each load combination is

reported for each check station of the column, along with the controlling P

u

,

M

ux

, and M

uy

set and associated load combination number.

Required Reinforcing Area

If the reinforcing area is not defined, the program computes the reinforce-

ment that will give a column capacity ratio of one, calculated as described in

the previous section entitled "Calculate Column Capacity Ratio."

Design Column Shear Reinforcement

The shear reinforcement is designed for each loading combination in the ma-

jor and minor directions of the column. The following steps are involved in

designing the shear reinforcing for a particular column for a particular load

combination caused by shear forces in a particular direction:

Determine the factored forces acting on the section, P

u

and V

u

. Note that

P

u

is needed for the calculation of V

c

.

Determine the shear force, V

c

, that can be resisted by concrete alone.

Calculate the reinforcement steel required to carry the balance.

For Special and Intermediate moment resisting frames (Ductile frames), the

shear design of the columns is also based on the probable and nominal mo-

ment capacities of the members, respectively, in addition to the factored

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Column Design

Design Column Shear Reinforcement Technical Note 10 - 11

moments. Effects of the axial forces on the column moment capacities are

included in the formulation.

The following three sections describe in detail the algorithms associated with

this process.

Determine Section Forces

In the design of the column shear reinforcement of an Ordinary moment

resisting concrete frame, the forces for a particular load combination,

namely, the column axial force, P

u

, and the column shear force, V

u

, in a

particular direction are obtained by factoring the program analysis load

cases with the corresponding load combination factors.

In the shear design of Special moment resisting frames (i.e., seismic

design) the column is checked for capacity-shear in addition to the re-

quirement for the Ordinary moment resisting frames. The capacity-shear

force in a column, V

p

, in a particular direction is calculated from the prob-

able moment capacities of the column associated with the factored axial

force acting on the column.

For each load combination, the factored axial load, P

u

, is calculated. Then,

the positive and negative moment capacities,

+

u

M and

−

u

M , of the column

in a particular direction under the influence of the axial force P

u

is calcu-

lated using the uniaxial interaction diagram in the corresponding direction.

The design shear force, V

u

, is then given by (UBC 1921.4.5.1)

V

u

= V

p

+ V

D+L

(UBC 1921.4.5.1)

where, V

p

is the capacity-shear force obtained by applying the calculated

probable ultimate moment capacities at the two ends of the column acting

in two opposite directions. Therefore, V

p

is the maximum of

1

P

V and

2

P

V ,

where

1

P

V =

L

M M

J I

+ −

+

, and

2

P

V =

L

M M

J I

− +

+

, where

Column Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 10 - 12 Design Column Shear Reinforcement

− +

I I

M M , , = Positive and negative moment capacities at end I of the

column using a steel yield stress value of αf

y

and no ϕ

factors (ϕ = 1.0),

− +

J J

M M , , = Positive and negative moment capacities at end J of the

column using a steel yield stress value of αf

y

and no ϕ

factors (ϕ = 1.0), and

L = Clear span of column.

For Special moment resisting frames, α is taken as 1.25 (UBC 1921.0).

V

D+L

is the contribution of shear force from the in-span distribution of

gravity loads. For most of the columns, it is zero.

For Intermediate moment resisting frames, the shear capacity of the

column is also checked for the capacity-shear based on the nominal mo-

ment capacities at the ends and the factored gravity loads, in addition to

the check required for Ordinary moment resisting frames. The design

shear force is taken to be the minimum of that based on the nominal (ϕ =

1.0) moment capacity and factored shear force. The procedure for calcu-

lating nominal moment capacity is the same as that for computing the

probable moment capacity for special moment resisting frames, except

that α is taken equal to 1 rather than 1.25 (UBC 1921.0, 1921.8.3). The

factored shear forces are based on the specified load factors, except the

earthquake load factors are doubled (UBC 1921.8.3).

Determine Concrete Shear Capacity

Given the design force set P

u

and V

u

, the shear force carried by the concrete,

V

c

, is calculated as follows:

If the column is subjected to axial compression, i.e., P

u

is positive,

V

c

= 2

cv

g

u

c

A

A

P

f

+

000 , 2

1

'

, (UBC 1911.3.1.2)

where,

'

c

f ≤ 100 psi, and (UBC 1911.1.2)

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Column Design

Design Column Shear Reinforcement Technical Note 10 - 13

V

c

≤ 3.5

'

c

f

cv

g

u

A

A

P

+

500

1 . (UBC 1911.3.2.2)

The term

g

u

A

P

must have psi units. A

cv

is the effective shear area which is

shown shaded in Figure 6. For circular columns, A

cv

is not taken to be

greater than 0.8 times the gross area (UBC 1911.5.6.2).

Figure 6 Shear Stress Area, A

cv

Column Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 10 - 14 Design Column Shear Reinforcement

If the column is subjected to axial tension, P

u

is negative, (UBC

1911.3.2.3)

V

c

= 2

'

c

f

+

g

u

A

P

500

1 A

cv

≥ 0 (UBC 1911.3.2.3)

For Special moment resisting concrete frame design, V

c

is set to zero

if the factored axial compressive force, P

u

, including the earthquake effect

is small (Pu <

'

c

f A

g

/ 20) and if the shear force contribution from earth-

quake, V

E

, is more than half of the total factored maximum shear force

over the length of the member V

u

(V

E

≥ 0.5V

u

) (UBC 1921.4.5.2).

Determine Required Shear Reinforcement

Given V

u

and V

c

, the required shear reinforcement in the form of stirrups or

ties within a spacing, s, is given for rectangular and circular columns by the

following:

A

v

=

d f

s V V

ys

c u

) / ( − ϕ

, for rectangular columns (UBC 1911.5.6.1, 1911.5.6.2)

A

v

=

'

) / ( 2

D f

s V V

ys

c u

− ϕ

π

, for circular columns (UBC 1911.5.6.1, 1911.5.6.2)

V

u

is limited by the following relationship.

(V

u

/ ϕ-V

c

) ≤ 8

'

c

f A

cv

(UBC 1911.5.6.8)

Otherwise redimensioning of the concrete section is required. Here ϕ, the

strength reduction factor, is 0.85 for nonseismic design or for seismic design

in Seismic Zones 0, 1, and 2 (UBC 1909.3.2.3) and is 0.60 for seismic design

in Seismic Zones 3 and 4 (UBC 1909.3.4.1). The maximum of all the calcu-

lated values obtained from each load combination are reported for the major

and minor directions of the column, along with the controlling shear force and

associated load combination label.

The column shear reinforcement requirements reported by the program are

based purely on shear strength consideration. Any minimum stirrup require-

ments to satisfy spacing considerations or transverse reinforcement volumet-

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Column Design

Reference Technical Note 10 - 15

ric considerations must be investigated independently of the program by the

user.

Reference

White. D. W., and J.F., Hajjar. 1991. Application of Second-Order Elastic

Analysis in LRFD: Research in Practice. Engineering Journal. American

Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. Vol. 28, No. 4.

Overview Technical Note 11 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN UBC97

Technical Note 11

Beam Design

This Technical Note describes how this program completes beam design when

the UBC97 code is selected. The program calculates and reports the required

areas of steel for flexure and shear based on the beam moments, shears, load

combination factors and other criteria described herein.

Overview

In the design of concrete beams, the program calculates and reports the re-

quired areas of steel for flexure and shear based upon the beam moments,

shears, load combination factors, and other criteria described below. The re-

inforcement requirements are calculated at a user-defined number of

check/design stations along the beam span.

All beams are designed for major direction flexure and shear only.

Effects caused by axial forces, minor direction bending, and torsion

that may exist in the beams must be investigated independently by

the user.

The beam design procedure involves the following steps:

Design beam flexural reinforcement

Design beam shear reinforcement

Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement

The beam top and bottom flexural steel is designed at check/design stations

along the beam span. The following steps are involved in designing the flex-

ural reinforcement for the major moment for a particular beam for a particu-

lar section:

Determine the maximum factored moments

Determine the reinforcing steel

Beam Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 11 - 2 Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement

Determine Factored Moments

In the design of flexural reinforcement of Special, Intermediate, or Ordinary

moment resisting concrete frame beams, the factored moments for each load

combination at a particular beam section are obtained by factoring the corre-

sponding moments for different load cases with the corresponding load fac-

tors.

The beam section is then designed for the maximum positive

+

u

M and maxi-

mum negative

−

u

M factored moments obtained from all of the load combina-

tions

.

Negative beam moments produce top steel. In such cases, the beam is al-

ways designed as a rectangular section. Positive beam moments produce

bottom steel. In such cases, the beam may be designed as a Rectangular- or

a T-beam.

Determine Required Flexural Reinforcement

In the flexural reinforcement design process, the program calculates both the

tension and compression reinforcement. Compression reinforcement is added

when the applied design moment exceeds the maximum moment capacity of

a singly reinforced section. The user has the option of avoiding the compres-

sion reinforcement by increasing the effective depth, the width, or the grade

of concrete.

The design procedure is based on the simplified rectangular stress block as

shown in Figure 1 (UBC 1910.2). It is assumed that the compression carried

by concrete is less than 0.75 times that which can be carried at the balanced

condition (UBC 1910.3.3). When the applied moment exceeds the moment

capacity at this designed balanced condition, the area of compression rein-

forcement is calculated assuming that the additional moment will be carried

by compression and additional tension reinforcement.

The design procedure used by the program for both rectangular and flanged

sections (L- and T-beams) is summarized below. It is assumed that the de-

sign ultimate axial force does not exceed 0.1

'

c

f A

g

(UBC 1910.3.3); hence, all

the beams are designed for major direction flexure and shear only.

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Beam Design

Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement Technical Note 11 - 3

Figure 1 Design of a Rectangular Beam Section

Design for Rectangular Beam

In designing for a factored negative or positive moment, M

u

(i.e., designing

top or bottom steel), the depth of the compression block is given by a (see

Figure 1), where,

a = d -

b f

M

d

c

u

ϕ

−

'

2

85 . 0

2

,

where the value of ϕ is 0.90 (UBC 1909.3.2.1) in the above and the following

equations. Also β

1

and c

b

are calculated as follows:

β

1

= 0.85 - 0.05

(

(

,

\

,

,

(

j

−

000 , 1

000 , 4

'

c

f

, 0.65 ≤ β

1

≤ 0.85, (UBC 1910.2.7.3)

c

b

= d

f E

E

y s c

s c

+ ε

ε

=

y

f + 000 , 87

000 , 87

d. (UBC 1910.2.3, 1910.2.4)

Beam Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 11 - 4 Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement

The maximum allowed depth of the compression block is given by

a

max

= 0.75β

1

c

b

. (UBC 1910.2.7.1, 1910.3.3)

If a ≤ a

max

, the area of tensile steel reinforcement is given by

A

s

=

(

,

\

,

(

j

− ϕ

2

a

d f

M

y

u

.

This steel is to be placed at the bottom if M

u

is positive, or at the top if M

u

is negative.

If a > a

max

, compression reinforcement is required (UBC 1910.3.3) and is

calculated as follows:

− The compressive force developed in concrete alone is given by

C = 0.85

'

c

f ba

max

, and (UBC 1910.2.7.1)

the moment resisted by concrete compression and tensile steel is

M

uc

= C

(

(

,

\

,

,

(

j

−

2

max

a

d ϕ.

− Therefore the moment resisted by compression steel and tensile steel is

M

us

= M

u

- M

uc

.

− So the required compression steel is given by

'

s

A =

ϕ − ) ' (

'

d d f

M

s

us

, where

'

s

f = 0.003E

s

]

]

]

,

¸

, −

c

d c '

. (UBC 1910.2.4)

− The required tensile steel for balancing the compression in concrete is

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Beam Design

Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement Technical Note 11 - 5

A

s1

=

ϕ

]

]

]

,

¸

,

−

2

max

a

d f

M

y

uc

, and

the tensile steel for balancing the compression in steel is given by

A

s2

=

ϕ − ) ' ( d d f

M

y

us

.

− Therefore, the total tensile reinforcement, A

s

= A

s1

+ A

s2

, and total com-

pression reinforcement is

'

s

A . A

s

is to be placed at bottom and

'

s

A is to

be placed at top if M

u

is positive, and vice versa if M

u

is negative.

Design for T-Beam

In designing for a factored negative moment, M

u

(i.e., designing top steel),

the calculation of the steel area is exactly the same as above, i.e., no T-Beam

data is to be used. See Figure 2. If M

u

> 0, the depth of the compression

block is given by

a = d -

f c

u

b f

M

d

ϕ

−

'

2

85 . 0

2

.

The maximum allowed depth of the compression block is given by

a

max

= 0.75β

1

c

b

. (UBC 1910.2.7.1)

If a ≤ d

s

, the subsequent calculations for A

s

are exactly the same as previously

defined for the rectangular section design. However, in this case, the width of

the compression flange is taken as the width of the beam for analysis. Com-

pression reinforcement is required if a > a

max

.

If a > d

s

, calculation for A

s

is performed in two parts. The first part is for bal-

ancing the compressive force from the flange, C

f

, and the second part is for

balancing the compressive force from the web, C

w

, as shown in Figure 2. C

f

is

given by

C

f

= 0.85

'

c

f (bf - b

w

) d

s

.

Beam Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 11 - 6 Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement

Figure 2 Design of a T-Beam Section

Therefore, A

s1

=

y

f

f

C

and the portion of M

u

that is resisted by the flange is

given by

M

uf

= C

f

(

(

,

\

,

,

(

j

−

2

s

d

d ϕ .

Again, the value for ϕ is 0.90. Therefore, the balance of the moment, M

u

to be

carried by the web is given by

M

uw

= M

u

- M

uf

.

The web is a rectangular section of dimensions b

w

and d, for which the design

depth of the compression block is recalculated as

a

1

= d -

w c

uw

b f

M

d

ϕ

−

'

2

85 . 0

2

.

If a

1

≤ a

max

, the area of tensile steel reinforcement is then given by

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Beam Design

Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement Technical Note 11 - 7

A

s2

=

(

(

,

\

,

,

(

j

− ϕ

2

1

a

d f

M

y

uw

, and

A

s

= A

s1

+ A

s2

.

This steel is to be placed at the bottom of the T-beam.

If a

1

> a

max

, compression reinforcement is required (UBC 1910.3.3) and is

calculated as follows:

− The compressive force in web concrete alone is given by

C = 0.85

'

c

f ba

max

. (UBC 1910.2.7.1)

− Therefore the moment resisted by concrete web and tensile steel is

M

uc

= C

(

(

,

\

,

,

(

j

−

2

max

a

d ϕ, and

the moment resisted by compression steel and tensile steel is

M

us

= M

uw

- M

uc

.

− Therefore, the compression steel is computed as

'

s

A =

ϕ − ) ' (

'

d d f

M

s

us

, where

'

s

f = 0.003E

s

]

]

]

,

¸

, −

c

d c '

. (UBC 1910.2.4)

− The tensile steel for balancing compression in web concrete is

A

s2

=

ϕ

(

(

,

\

,

,

(

j

−

2

max

a

d f

M

y

uc

, and

the tensile steel for balancing compression in steel is

Beam Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 11 - 8 Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement

A

s3

=

( )ϕ − ' d d f

M

y

us

.

− The total tensile reinforcement, A

s

= A

s1

+ A

s2

+ A

s3

, and total compres-

sion reinforcement is

'

s

A . A

s

is to be placed at bottom and

'

s

A is to be

placed at top.

Minimum Tensile Reinforcement

The minimum flexural tensile steel provided in a rectangular section in an Or-

dinary moment resisting frame is given by the minimum of the two following

limits:

A

s

≥ max

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

d b

f

d b

f

f

w

y

w

y

c

200

and

3

'

or (UBC 1910.5.1)

A

s

≥

3

4

A

s(required)

(UBC 1910.5.3)

Special Consideration for Seismic Design

For Special moment resisting concrete frames (seismic design), the beam de-

sign satisfies the following additional conditions (see also Table 1 for compre-

hensive listing):

The minimum longitudinal reinforcement shall be provided at both the top

and bottom. Any of the top and bottom reinforcement shall not be less

than A

s(min)

(UBC 1921.3.2.1).

A

s(min)

≥ max

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

d b

f

d b

f

f

w

y

w

y

c

200

and

3

'

or (UBC 1910.5.1, 1921.3.2.1)

A

s(min)

≥

3

4

A

s(required)

. (UBC 1910.5.3, 1921.3.2.1)

The beam flexural steel is limited to a maximum given by

A

s

≤ 0.25 b

w

d. (UBC 1921.3.2.1)

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Beam Design

Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement Technical Note 11 - 9

Table 1 Design Criteria Table

Type of

Check/

Design

Ordinary Moment

Resisting Frames

(Seismic Zones 0&1)

Intermediate Moment

Resisting Frames

(Seismic Zone 2)

Special Moment

Resisting Frames

(Seismic Zones 3 & 4)

Column

Check

(interaction)

NLD

a

Combinations NLD

a

Combinations NLD

a

Combinations

Column

Design

(interaction)

NLD

a

Combinations

1% < ρ < 8%

NLD

a

Combinations

1% < ρ < 8%

NLD

a

Combinations

α = 1.0

1% < ρ < 6%

Column

Shears

NLD

a

Combinations

Modified NLD

a

Combinations

(earthquake loads doubled)

Column Capacity

ϕ = 1.0 and α = 1.0

NLD

a

Combinations and

Column shear capacity

ϕ = 1.0 and α = 1.25

Beam

Design

Flexure

NLD

a

Combinations NLD

a

Combinations

NLD

a

Combinations

ρ ≤ 0.025

ρ ≥

y y

c

f f

f

200

,

3

'

≥ ρ

Beam Min.

Moment

Override

Check

No Requirement

− +

≥

uEND uEND

M M

3

1

¦ ¦

END u u uSPAN

M M M

− + +

≥ , max

5

1

¦ ¦

END u u uSPAN

M M M

− + −

≥ , max

5

1

− +

≥

uEND uEND

M M

2

1

¦ ¦

END u u uSPAN

M M M

− + +

≥ , max

4

1

¦ ¦

END u u uSPAN

M M M

− − −

≥ , max

4

1

Beam

Design

Shear

NLD

a

Combinations

Modified NLD

a

Combinations

(earthquake loads doubled)

Beam Capacity Shear (Vp)

with α = 1.0 and ϕ = 1.0

plus VD+L

NLD

a

Combinations

Beam Capacity Shear (Vp)

with α = 1.25 and ϕ = 1.0

plus VD+L

Vc = 0

Joint

Design

No Requirement No Requirement Checked for shear

Beam/

Column

Capacity

Ratio

No Requirement No Requirement Reported in output file

NLD

a

= Number of specified loading

Beam Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 11 - 10 Design Beam Shear Reinforcement

At any end (support) of the beam, the beam positive moment capacity

(i.e., associated with the bottom steel) would not be less than 1/2 of the

beam negative moment capacity (i.e., associated with the top steel) at

that end (UBC 1921.3.2.2).

Neither the negative moment capacity nor the positive moment capacity

at any of the sections within the beam would be less than 1/4 of the

maximum of positive or negative moment capacities of any of the beam

end (support) stations (UBC 1921.3.2.2).

For Intermediate moment resisting concrete frames (i.e., seismic design), the

beam design would satisfy the following conditions:

At any support of the beam, the beam positive moment capacity would

not be less than 1/3 of the beam negative moment capacity at that end

(UBC 1921.8.4.1).

Neither the negative moment capacity nor the positive moment capacity

at any of the sections within the beam would be less than 1/5 of the

maximum of positive or negative moment capacities of any of the beam

end (support) stations (UBC 1921.8.4.1).

Design Beam Shear Reinforcement

The shear reinforcement is designed for each load combination at a user-

defined number of stations along the beam span. The following steps are in-

volved in designing the shear reinforcement for a particular beam for a par-

ticular load combination at a particular station resulting from the beam major

shear:

Determine the factored shear force, V

u

.

Determine the shear force, V

c

, that can be resisted by the concrete.

Determine the reinforcement steel required to carry the balance.

For Special and Intermediate moment resisting frames (Ductile frames), the

shear design of the beams is also based on the probable and nominal moment

capacities of the members, respectively, in addition to the factored load de-

sign.

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Beam Design

Design Beam Shear Reinforcement Technical Note 11 - 11

The following three sections describe in detail the algorithms associated with

this process.

Determine Shear Force and Moment

In the design of the beam shear reinforcement of an Ordinary moment

resisting concrete frame, the shear forces and moments for a particular

load combination at a particular beam section are obtained by factoring

the associated shear forces and moments with the corresponding load

combination factors.

In the design of Special moment resisting concrete frames (i.e.,

seismic design), the shear capacity of the beam is also checked for the

capacity-shear associated with the probable moment capacities at the

ends and the factored gravity load. This check is performed in addition to

the design check required for Ordinary moment resisting frames. The ca-

pacity-shear force, V

p

, is calculated from the probable moment capacities

of each end of the beam and the gravity shear forces. The procedure for

calculating the design shear force in a beam from probable moment ca-

pacity is the same as that described for a column in section “Design Col-

umn Shear Reinforcement” in Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical

Note 10 Column Design. See also Table 1 for details.

The design shear force V

u

is then given by (UBC 1921.3.4.1)

V

u

= V

p

+ V

D+L

(UBC 1921.3.4.1)

where V

p

is the capacity shear force obtained by applying the calculated

probable ultimate moment capacities at the two ends of the beams acting

in opposite directions. Therefore, V

p

is the maximum of

1

P

V and

2

P

V ,

where

1

P

V =

L

M M

J I

+ −

+

, and

2

P

V =

L

M M

J I

− +

+

, where

−

I

M = Moment capacity at end I, with top steel in tension, using a

steel yield stress value of αf

y

and no ϕ factors (ϕ = 1.0),

Beam Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 11 - 12 Design Beam Shear Reinforcement

+

J

M = Moment capacity at end J, with bottom steel in tension, using a

steel yield stress value of αf

y

and no ϕ factors (ϕ = 1.0),

+

I

M = Moment capacity at end I, with bottom steel in tension, using a

steel yield stress value of αf

y

and no ϕ factors (ϕ = 1.0),

−

J

M = Moment capacity at end J, with top steel in tension, using a

steel yield stress value of αf

y

and no ϕ factors (ϕ = 1.0), and

L = Clear span of beam.

For Special moment resisting frames, α is taken as 1.25 (UBC 1921.0).

V

D+L

is the contribution of shear force from the in-span distribution of

gravity loads.

For Intermediate moment resisting frames, the shear capacity of the

beam is also checked for the capacity shear based on the nominal moment

capacities at the ends and the factored gravity loads, in addition to the

check required for Ordinary moment resisting frames. The design shear

force in beams is taken to be the minimum of that based on the nominal

moment capacity and factored shear force. The procedure for calculating

nominal (ϕ = 1.0) moment capacity is the same as that for computing the

probable moment capacity for Special moment resisting frames, except

that α is taken equal to 1 rather than 1.25 (UBC 1921.0, 1921.8.3). The

factored shear forces are based on the specified load factors, except the

earthquake load factors are doubled (UBC 1921.8.3). The computation of

the design shear force in a beam of an Intermediate moment resisting

frame is also the same as that for columns, which is described in Con-

crete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 10 Column Design. Also see

Table 1 for details.

Determine Concrete Shear Capacity

The allowable concrete shear capacity is given by

V

c

= 2

'

c

f b

w

d. (UBC 1911.3.1.1)

For Special moment resisting frame concrete design, V

c

is set to zero if both

the factored axial compressive force, including the earthquake effect P

u

, is

less than

'

c

f A

g

/20 and the shear force contribution from earthquake V

E

is

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Beam Design

Design Beam Shear Reinforcement Technical Note 11 - 13

more than half of the total maximum shear force over the length of the mem-

ber V

u

(i.e., V

E

≥ 0.5V

u

) (UBC 1921.3.4.2).

Determine Required Shear Reinforcement

Given V

u

and V

c

, the required shear reinforcement in area/unit length is cal-

culated as

A

v

=

d f

s V V

ys

c u

) / ( − ϕ

. (UBC 1911.5.6.1, 1911.5.6.2)

The shear force resisted by steel is limited by

(V

u

/ϕ - V

c

) ≤ 8

'

c

f bd. (UBC 1911.5.6.8)

Otherwise, redimensioning of the concrete section is required. Here ϕ, the

strength reduction factor, is 0.85 for nonseismic design or for seismic design

in Seismic Zones 0, 1, and 2 (UBC 1909.3.2.3) and is 0.60 for seismic design

in Seismic Zones 3 and 4 (UBC 1909.3.4.1). The maximum of all the calcu-

lated A

v

values, obtained from each load combination, is reported along with

the controlling shear force and associated load combination number.

The beam shear reinforcement requirements displayed by the program are

based purely on shear strength considerations. Any minimum stirrup require-

ments to satisfy spacing and volumetric considerations must be investigated

independently of the program by the user.

Overview Technical Note 12 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN UBC97

Technical Note 12

Joint Design

This Technical Note explains how the program performs a rational analysis of

the beam-column panel zone to determine the shear forces that are gener-

ated in a joint. The program then checks this against design shear strength.

Overview

To ensure that the beam-column joint of special moment resisting frames

possesses adequate shear strength, the program performs a rational analysis

of the beam-column panel zone to determine the shear forces that are gener-

ated in the joint. The program then checks this against design shear strength.

Only joints having a column below the joint are designed. The mate-

rial properties of the joint are assumed to be the same as those of the

column below the joint.

The joint analysis is completed in the major and the minor directions of the

column. The joint design procedure involves the following steps:

• Determine the panel zone design shear force,V

u

h

• Determine the effective area of the joint

• Check panel zone shear stress

The algorithms associated with these three steps are described in detail in the

following three sections.

Determine the Panel Zone Shear Force

Figure 1 illustrates the free body stress condition of a typical beam-column

intersection for a column direction, major or minor.

Joint Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 12 - 2 Determine the Panel Zone Shear Force

Figure1 Beam-Column Joint Analysis

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Joint Design

Determine the Panel Zone Shear Force Technical Note 12 - 3

The force V

u

h

is the horizontal panel zone shear force that is to be calculated.

The forces that act on the joint are P

u

, V

u

, M

u

L

and M

u

R

. The forces P

u

and V

u

are axial force and shear force, respectively, from the column framing into the

top of the joint. The moments M

u

L

and M

u

R

are obtained from the beams

framing into the joint. The program calculates the joint shear force V

u

h

by re-

solving the moments into C and T forces. Noting that T

L

= C

L

and T

R

= C

R

,

V

u

h

= T

L

+ T

R

- V

u

The location of C or T forces is determined by the direction of the moment.

The magnitude of C or T forces is conservatively determined using basic prin-

ciples of ultimate strength theory, ignoring compression reinforcement as fol-

lows. The program first calculates the maximum compression, C

max

, and the

maximum moment, M

max

, that can be carried by the beam.

bd f C

c

'

max

85 . 0

2

max max

d

C M

Then the program conservatively determines C and T forces as follows:

(

(

,

\

,

,

(

j

− −

max

max

) (

1 1

M

M abs

C T C

The program resolves the moments and the C and T forces from beams that

frame into the joint in a direction that is not parallel to the major or minor

directions of the column along the direction that is being investigated, thereby

contributing force components to the analysis. Also, the program calculates

the C and T for the positive and negative moments, considering the fact that

the concrete cover may be different for the direction of moment.

In the design of special moment resisting concrete frames, the evaluation of

the design shear force is based on the moment capacities (with reinforcing

steel overstrength factor, α, and no ϕ factors) of the beams framing into the

joint (UBC 1921.5.1.1). The C and T forces are based on these moment ca-

pacities. The program calculates the column shear force V

u

from the beam

moment capacities, as follows:

Joint Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 12 - 4 Determine the Panel Zone Shear Force

H

M M

V

R

u

L

u

u

+

**See Figure 2. It should be noted that the points of inflection shown on Figure
**

2 are taken as midway between actual lateral support points for the columns.

If there is no column at the top of the joint, the shear force from the top of

the column is taken as zero.

Figure 2 Column Shear Force V

u

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Joint Design

Determine the Effective Area of Joint Technical Note 12 - 5

The effects of load reversals, as illustrated in Case 1 and Case 2 of Figure 1,

are investigated and the design is based on the maximum of the joint shears

obtained from the two cases.

Determine the Effective Area of Joint

The joint area that resists the shear forces is assumed always to be rectan-

gular in plan view. The dimensions of the rectangle correspond to the major

and minor dimensions of the column below the joint, except if the beam

framing into the joint is very narrow. The effective width of the joint area to

be used in the calculation is limited to the width of the beam plus the depth of

the column. The area of the joint is assumed not to exceed the area of the

column below. The joint area for joint shear along the major and minor direc-

tions is calculated separately (ACI R21.5.3).

It should be noted that if the beam frames into the joint eccentrically, the

above assumptions may be unconservative and the user should investigate

the acceptability of the particular joint.

Check Panel Zone Shear Stress

The panel zone shear stress is evaluated by dividing the shear force V

u

h

by

the effective area of the joint and comparing it with the following design shear

strengths (UBC 1921.5.3):

20ϕ

c

f '

for joints confined on all four sides

v = 15ϕ

c

f '

for joints confined on three faces or on two

opposite faces

¦

12ϕ

c

f '

for all other joints

where ϕ = 0.85 (by default). (UBC 1909.3.2.3,1909.3.4.1)

A beam that frames into a face of a column at the joint is considered in this

program to provide confinement to the joint if at least three-quarters of the

face of the joint is covered by the framing member (UBC 1921.5.3.1).

Joint Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 12 - 6 Beam/Column Flexural Capacity Ratios

For light-weight aggregate concrete, the design shear strength of the joint is

reduced in the program to at least three-quarters of that of the normal weight

concrete by replacing the

'

c

f with

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦ '

,

4 / 3 , ' min

c c factor cs

f f f (UBC 1921.5.3.2)

For joint design, the program reports the joint shear, the joint shear stress,

the allowable joint shear stress and a capacity ratio.

Beam/Column Flexural Capacity Ratios

At a particular joint for a particular column direction, major or minor, the pro-

gram will calculate the ratio of the sum of the beam moment capacities to the

sum of the column moment capacities. For Special Moment-Resisting Frames,

the following UBC provision needs to be satisfied (UBC 1921.4.2.2).

∑M

e

≥

5

6

∑M

g

(UBC 1921.4.2.2)

The capacities are calculated with no reinforcing overstrength factor, α, and

including ϕ factors. The beam capacities are calculated for reversed situations

(Cases 1 and 2) as illustrated in Figure 1 and the maximum summation ob-

tained is used.

The moment capacities of beams that frame into the joint in a direction that is

not parallel to the major or minor direction of the column are resolved along

the direction that is being investigated and the resolved components are

added to the summation.

The column capacity summation includes the column above and the column

below the joint. For each load combination, the axial force, P

u

, in each of the

columns is calculated from the program analysis load combinations. For each

load combination, the moment capacity of each column under the influence of

the corresponding axial load P

u

is then determined separately for the major

and minor directions of the column, using the uniaxial column interaction dia-

gram, see Figure 3. The moment capacities of the two columns are added to

give the capacity summation for the corresponding load combination. The

maximum capacity summations obtained from all of the load combinations is

used for the beam/column capacity ratio.

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Joint Design

Beam/Column Flexural Capacity Ratios Technical Note 12 - 7

The beam/column flexural capacity ratios are only reported for Special Mo-

ment-Resisting Frames involving seismic design load combinations. If this ra-

tio is greater than 5/6, a warning message is printed in the output file.

Figure 3 Moment Capacity M

u

at a Given Axial Load P

u

Input Data Technical Note 13 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN UBC97

Technical Note 13

Input Data

This Technical Note describes the concrete frame design input data for

UBC97. The input can be printed to a printer or to a text file when you click

the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design command. A

printout of the input data provides the user with the opportunity to carefully

review the parameters that have been input into the program and upon which

program design is based. Further information about using the Print Design

Tables form is presented at the end of this Technical Note.

Input Data

The program provides the printout of the input data in a series of tables. The

column headings for input data and a description of what is included in the

columns of the tables are provided in Table 1 of this Technical Note.

Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Input Data

COLUMN HEADING DESCRIPTION

Load Combination Multipliers

Combo Design load combination. See Technical Note 8.

Type

Load type: dead, live, superimposed dead, earthquake, wind,

snow, reduced live load, other.

Case Name of load case.

Factor Load combination scale factor.

Code Preferences

Phi_bending Bending strength reduction factor.

Phi_tension Tensile strength reduction factor.

Phi_compression

(Tied)

Compressive strength reduction factor for tied columns.

Phi_compression (Spi-

ral)

Compressive strength reduction factor for reinforced columns.

Phi_shear Shear strength reduction factor.

Input Data Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 13 - 2 Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Input Data

Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Input Data

COLUMN HEADING DESCRIPTION

Material Property Data

Material Name Concrete, steel, other.

Material Type Isotropic or orthotropic.

Design Type

Modulus of Elasticity

Poisson's Ratio

Thermal Coeff Coefficient of thermal expansion.

Shear Modulus

Material Property Mass and Weight

Material Name Concrete, steel, other.

Mass Per Unit Vol Used to calculate self-mass of structure.

Weight Per Unit Vol Used to calculate self-weight of structure.

Material Design Data for Concrete Materials

Material Name Concrete, steel, other.

Lightweight Concrete

Concrete FC Concrete compressive strength.

Rebar FY Bending reinforcing steel yield strength.

Rebar FYS Shear reinforcing steel yield strength.

Lightwt Reduc Fact Shear strength reduction factor for light weight concrete; default

= 1.0.

Concrete Column Property Data

Section Label Label applied to section.

Mat Label Material label.

Column Depth

Column Width

Rebar Pattern Layout of main flexural reinforcing steel.

Concrete Cover Minimum clear concrete cover.

Bar Area Area of individual reinforcing bar to be used.

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Input Data

Using the Print Design Tables Form Technical Note 13 - 3

Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Input Data

COLUMN HEADING DESCRIPTION

Concrete Column Design Element Information

Story ID Column assigned to story level at top of column.

Column Line Grid line.

Section ID Name of section assigned to column.

Framing Type Lateral or gravity.

RLLF Factor

L_Ratio Major Unbraced length about major axis.

L_Ratio Minor Unbraced length about minor axis.

K Major Effective length factor; default = 1.0.

K Minor Effective length factor; default = 1.0.

Concrete Beam Design Element Information

Story ID Story level at which beam occurs.

Bay ID Grid lines locating beam.

Section ID Section number assigned to beam.

Framing type Lateral or gravity.

RLLF Factor

L_Ratio Major Unbraced length about major axis.

L_Ratio Minor Unbraced length about minor axis.

Using the Print Design Tables Form

To print steel frame design input data directly to a printer, use the File menu

> Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design command and click the check

box on the Print Design Tables form. Click the OK button to send the print to

your printer. Click the Cancel button rather than the OK button to cancel the

print. Use the File menu > Print Setup command and the Setup>> button

to change printers, if necessary.

To print steel frame design input data to a file, click the Print to File check box

on the Print Design Tables form. Click the Filename>> button to change the

Input Data Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 13 - 4 Using the Print Design Tables Form

path or filename. Use the appropriate file extension for the desired format

(e.g., .txt, .xls, .doc). Click the OK buttons on the Open File for Printing Ta-

bles form and the Print Design Tables form to complete the request.

Note:

The File menu > Display Input/Output Text Files command is useful for displaying out-

put that is printed to a text file.

The Append check box allows you to add data to an existing file. The path and

filename of the current file is displayed in the box near the bottom of the Print

Design Tables form. Data will be added to this file. Or use the Filename>>

button to locate another file, and when the Open File for Printing Tables cau-

tion box appears, click Yes to replace the existing file.

If you select a specific frame element(s) before using the File menu > Print

Tables > Concrete Frame Design command, the Selection Only check box

will be checked. The print will be for the selected beam(s) only.

Table 1 Concrete Column Design Output Technical Note 14 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN UBC97

Technical Note 14

Output Details

This Technical Note describes the concrete frame design output for UBC97

that can be printed to a printer or to a text file. The design output is printed

when you click the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design

command and select Output Summary of the Print Design Tables dialog box.

Further information about using the Print Design Tables dialog box is pre-

sented at the end of this Technical Note.

The program provides the output data in a series of tables. The column

headings for output data and a description of what is included in the columns

of the tables are provided in Table 1 of this Technical Note.

Table 1 Concrete Column Design Output

COLUMN HEADING DESCRIPTION

Biaxial P-M Interaction and Shear Design of Column-Type Elements

Story ID Column assigned to story level at top of column.

Column Line Grid lines.

Section ID Name of section assigned to column.

Station ID

Required Reinforcing

Longitudinal Area of longitudinal reinforcing required.

Combo Load combination for which the reinforcing is designed.

Shear22 Shear reinforcing required.

Combo Load combination for which the reinforcing is designed.

Shear33 Shear reinforcing required.

Output Details Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Technical Note 14 - 2 Table 2 Concrete Column Joint Output

Table 1 Concrete Column Design Output

COLUMN HEADING DESCRIPTION

Combo Load combination for which the reinforcing is designed.

Table 2 Concrete Column Joint Output

COLUMN HEADING DESCRIPTION

Beam to Column Capacity Ratios and Joint Shear Capacity Check

Story ID Story level at which joint occurs.

Column Line Grid line.

Section ID Assigned section name.

Beam-Column Capacity Ratios

Major Ratio of beam moment capacity to column capacity.

Combo Load combination upon which the ratio of beam moment ca-

pacity to column capacity is based.

Minor Ratio of beam moment capacity to column capacity.

Combo Load combination upon which the ratio of beam moment ca-

pacity to column capacity is based.

Joint Shear Capacity Ratios

Major Ratio of factored load versus allowed capacity.

Combo Load combination upon which the ratio of factored load versus

allowed capacity is based.

Minor Ratio of factored load versus allowed capacity.

Combo Load combination upon which the ratio of factored load versus

allowed capacity is based.

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Output Details

Using the Print Design Tables Form Technical Note 14 - 3

Using the Print Design Tables Form

To print concrete frame design input data directly to a printer, use the File

menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design command and click the

check box on the Print Design Tables dialog box. Click the OK button to send

the print to your printer. Click the Cancel button rather than the OK button

to cancel the print. Use the File menu > Print Setup command and the

Setup>> button to change printers, if necessary.

To print concrete frame design input data to a file, click the Print to File check

box on the Print Design Tables dialog box. Click the Filename>> button to

change the path or filename. Use the appropriate file extension for the de-

sired format (e.g., .txt, .xls, .doc). Click the OK buttons on the Open File for

Printing Tables dialog box and the Print Design Tables dialog box to complete

the request.

Note:

The File menu > Display Input/Output Text Files command is useful for displaying out-

put that is printed to a text file.

The Append check box allows you to add data to an existing file. The path and

filename of the current file is displayed in the box near the bottom of the Print

Design Tables dialog box. Data will be added to this file. Or use the File-

name>> button to locate another file, and when the Open File for Printing

Tables caution box appears, click Yes to replace the existing file.

If you select a specific frame element(s) before using the File menu > Print

Tables > Concrete Frame Design command, the Selection Only check box

will be checked. The print will be for the selected beam(s) only.

Introduction to the ACI318-99 Series of Technical Notes Technical Note 15 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN ACI-318-99

Technical Note 15

General and Notation

Introduction to the ACI318-99 Series of Technical Notes

The ACI-318-99 Concrete Frame Design series of Technical Notes describes in

detail the various aspects of the concrete design procedure that is used by

this program when the user selects the ACI-318-99 Design Code (ACI 1999).

The various notations used in this series are listed herein.

The design is based on user-specified loading combinations. The program

provides a set of default load combinations that should satisfy requirements

for the design of most building type structures. See Concrete Frame Design

ACI-318-99 Technical Note 18 Design Load Combination for more information.

The program provides options to design or check Earthquake resisting

frames; Ordinary, Earthquake resisting frames; Intermediate (moderate

seismic risk areas), and Earthquake resisting frames; Special (high seismic

risk areas) moment resisting frames as required for seismic design provisions.

The details of the design criteria used for the different framing systems are

described in Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Technical Note 19 Strength

Reduction Factors, Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Technical Note 20 Col-

umn Design, Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Technical Note 21 Beam De-

sign, and Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Technical Note 22 Joint Design.

The program uses preferences and overwrites, which are described in Con-

crete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Technical Note 16 Preferences and Concrete

Frame Design ACI-318-99 Technical Note 17 Overwrites. It also provides in-

put and output data summaries, which are described in Concrete Frame De-

sign ACI-318-99 Technical Note 23 Input Data and Concrete Frame Design

ACI-318-99 Technical Note 24 Output Details.

English as well as SI and MKS metric units can be used for input. But the code

is based on Inch-Pound-Second units. For simplicity, all equations and de-

scriptions presented in this chapter correspond to Inch-Pound-Second units

unless otherwise noted.

General and Notation Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99

Technical Note 15 - 2 Notation

Notation

A

cv

Area of concrete used to determine shear stress, sq-in

A

g

Gross area of concrete, sq-in

A

s

Area of tension reinforcement, sq-in

'

s

A

Area of compression reinforcement, sq-in

A

s(required)

Area of steel required for tension reinforcement, sq-in

A

st

Total area of column longitudinal reinforcement, sq-in

A

v

Area of shear reinforcement, sq-in

C

m

Coefficient, dependent upon column curvature, used to calculate

moment magnification factor

E

c

Modulus of elasticity of concrete, psi

E

s

Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, assumed as 29,000,000

psi (ACI 8.5.2)

I

g

Moment of inertia of gross concrete section about centroidal axis,

neglecting reinforcement, in

4

I

se

Moment of inertia of reinforcement about centroidal axis of

member cross section, in

4

L Clear unsupported length, in

M

1

Smaller factored end moment in a column, lb-in

M

2

Larger factored end moment in a column, lb-in

M

c

Factored moment to be used in design, lb-in

M

ns

Nonsway component of factored end moment, lb-in

M

s

Sway component of factored end moment, lb-in

Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 General and Notation

Notation Technical Note 15 - 3

M

u

Factored moment at section, lb-in

M

ux

Factored moment at section about X-axis, lb-in

M

uy

Factored moment at section about Y-axis, lb-in

P

b

Axial load capacity at balanced strain conditions, lb

P

c

Critical buckling strength of column, lb

P

max

Maximum axial load strength allowed, lb

P

0

Axial load capacity at zero eccentricity, lb

P

u

Factored axial load at section, lb

V

c

Shear resisted by concrete, lb

V

E

Shear force caused by earthquake loads, lb

V

D+L

Shear force from span loading, lb

V

u

Factored shear force at a section, lb

V

p

Shear force computed from probable moment capacity, lb

a Depth of compression block, in

a

b

Depth of compression block at balanced condition, in

b Width of member, in

b

f

Effective width of flange (T-Beam section), in

b

w

Width of web (T-Beam section), in

c Depth to neutral axis, in

c

b

Depth to neutral axis at balanced conditions, in

d Distance from compression face to tension reinforcement, in

d' Concrete cover to center of reinforcing, in

General and Notation Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99

Technical Note 15 - 4 Notation

d

s

Thickness of slab (T-Beam section), in

'

c

f

Specified compressive strength of concrete, psi

f

y

Specified yield strength of flexural reinforcement, psi

f

y

≤ 80,000 psi (ACI 9.4)

f

ys

Specified yield strength of shear reinforcement, psi

h Dimension of column, in

k Effective length factor

r Radius of gyration of column section, in

α Reinforcing steel overstrength factor

β

1

Absolute value of ratio of maximum factored axial dead load to

maximum factored axial total load

β

d

Absolute value of ratio or maximum factored axial dead load to

maximum factored axial total load

δ

s

Moment magnification factor for sway moments

δ

ns

Moment magnification factor for nonsway moments

ε

c

Strain in concrete

ε

s

Strain in reinforcing steel

ϕ Strength reduction factor

General Technical Note 16 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN ACI318-99

Technical Note 16

Preferences

This Technical Note describes the items in the Preferences form.

General

The concrete frame design preferences in this program are basic assignments

that apply to all concrete frame elements. Use the Options menu > Prefer-

ences > Concrete Frame Design command to access the Preferences form

where you can view and revise the concrete frame design preferences.

Default values are provided for all concrete frame design preference items.

Thus, it is not required that you specify or change any of the preferences. You

should, however, at least review the default values for the preference items

to make sure they are acceptable to you.

Using the Preferences Form

To view preferences, select the Options menu > Preferences > Concrete

Frame Design. The Preferences form will display. The preference options

are displayed in a two-column spreadsheet. The left column of the spread-

sheet displays the preference item name. The right column of the spreadsheet

displays the preference item value.

To change a preference item, left click the desired preference item in either

the left or right column of the spreadsheet. This activates a drop-down box or

highlights the current preference value. If the drop-down box appears, select

a new value. If the cell is highlighted, type in the desired value. The prefer-

ence value will update accordingly. You cannot overwrite values in the drop-

down boxes.

When you have finished making changes to the composite beam preferences,

click the OK button to close the form. You must click the OK button for the

changes to be accepted by the program. If you click the Cancel button to exit

Preferences Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99

Technical Note 16 - 2 Preferences

the form, any changes made to the preferences are ignored and the form is

closed.

Preferences

For purposes of explanation in this Technical Note, the preference items are

presented in Table. The column headings in the table are described as fol-

lows:

Item: The name of the preference item as it appears in the cells at the

left side of the Preferences form.

Possible Values: The possible values that the associated preference item

can have.

Default Value: The built-in default value that the program assumes for

the associated preference item.

Description: A description of the associated preference item.

Table 1: Concrete Frame Preferences

Item

Possible

Values

Default

Value Description

Design Code Any code in

the program

ACI 318-99 Design code used for design of

concrete frame elements.

Phi Bending

Tension

>0 0.9 Unitless strength reduction factor per

ACI 9.3.

Phi Compres-

sion Tied

>0 0.7 Unitless strength reduction factor per

ACI 9.3.

Phi Compres-

sion Spiral

>0 0.75 Unitless strength reduction factor per

ACI 9.3.

Phi Shear >0 0.85 Unitless strength reduction factor per

ACI 9.3.

Number Inter-

action Curves

≥4.0 24 Number of equally spaced interaction

curves used to create a full 360-degree

interaction surface (this item should be

a multiple of four). We recommend that

you use 24 for this item.

Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 Preferences

Preferences Technical Note 16 - 3

Table 1: Concrete Frame Preferences

Item

Possible

Values

Default

Value Description

Number Inter-

action Points

Any odd value

≥4.0

11 Number of points used for defining a

single curve in a concrete frame

interaction surface (this item should be

odd).

Time History

Design

Envelopes or

Step-by-Step

Envelopes Toggle for design load combinations

that include a time history designed for

the envelope of the time history, or

designed step-by-step for the entire

time history. If a single design load

combination has more than one time

history case in it, that design load

combination is designed for the

envelopes of the time histories,

regardless of what is specified here.

Overwrites Technical Note 17 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN ACI318-99

Technical Note 17

Overwrites

General

The concrete frame design overwrites are basic assignments that apply only

to those elements to which they are assigned. This Technical Note describes

concrete frame design overwrites for ACI318-99. To access the overwrites,

select an element and click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design >

View/Revise Overwrites command.

Default values are provided for all overwrite items. Thus, you do not need to

specify or change any of the overwrites. However, at least review the default

values for the overwrite items to make sure they are acceptable. When

changes are made to overwrite items, the program applies the changes only

to the elements to which they are specifically assigned; that is, to the ele-

ments that are selected when the overwrites are changed.

Overwrites

For explanation purposes in this Technical Note, the overwrites are presented

in Table 1. The column headings in the table are described as follows.

Item: The name of the overwrite item as it appears in the program. To

save space in the formes, these names are generally short.

Possible Values: The possible values that the associated overwrite item

can have.

Default Value: The default value that the program assumes for the asso-

ciated overwrite item.

Description: A description of the associated overwrite item.

An explanation of how to change an overwrite is provided at the end of this

Technical Note.

Overwrites Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99

Technical Note 17 - 2 Overwrites

Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Overwrites

Item

Possible

Values

Default

Value Description

Element

Section

Element

Type

Sway Special,

Sway Interme-

diate,

Sway

Ordinary

NonSway

Sway Special Frame type per moment frame defini-

tion given in ACI 21.1.

Live Load

Reduction

Factor

>0

≤1.0

1. Used to reduce the live load contribu-

tion to the factored loading.

Horizontal

Earthquake

Factor

>0

≤1.0

1

Unbraced

Length Ratio

(Major)

>0

≤1.0

1.0

Unbraced

Length Ratio

(Minor)

>0

≤1.0

1.0

Effective

Length Factor

(K Major)

>0

≤1.0

1 See ACI 10.12, 10.13 and Figure

R10.12.1.

Effective

Length Factor

(K Minor)

>0

≤1.0

1 See ACI 10.12, 10.13 and Figure

R10.12.1.

Moment

Coefficient

(Cm Major)

>0

≤1.0

1 Factor relating actual moment diagram

to an equivalent uniform moment dia-

gram. See ACI 10.12.3.

Moment

Coefficient

(Cm Minor)

>0

≤1.0

1 Factor relating actual moment diagram

to an equivalent uniform moment dia-

gram. See ACI 10.12.3.

NonSway

Moment Factor

(Dns Major)

>0

≤1.0

1 See ACI 10.12.

Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 Overwrites

Overwrites Technical Note 17 - 3

Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Overwrites

Item

Possible

Values

Default

Value Description

NonSway

Moment Factor

(Dns Minor)

1 See ACI 10.13.

Sway Moment

Factor

(Ds Major)

1 See ACI 10.13.

Sway Moment

Factor

(Ds Minor)

1 See ACI 10.13.

Making Changes in the Overwrites Form

To access the concrete frame overwrites, select an element and click the De-

sign menu > Concrete Frame Design > View/Revise Overwrites com-

mand.

The overwrites are displayed in the form with a column of check boxes and a

two-column spreadsheet. The left column of the spreadsheet contains the

name of the overwrite item. The right column of the spreadsheet contains the

overwrites values.

Initially, the check boxes in the Concrete Frame Design Overwrites form are

all unchecked and all of the cells in the spreadsheet have a gray background

to indicate that they are inactive and the items in the cells cannot be

changed. The names of the overwrite items are displayed in the first column

of the spreadsheet. The values of the overwrite items are visible in the second

column of the spreadsheet if only one element was selected before the over-

writes form was accessed. If multiple elements were selected, no values show

for the overwrite items in the second column of the spreadsheet.

After selecting one or multiple elements, check the box to the left of an over-

write item to change it. Then left click in either column of the spreadsheet to

activate a drop-down box or highlight the contents in the cell in the right col-

umn of the spreadsheet. If the drop-down box appears, select a value from

Overwrites Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99

Technical Note 17 - 4 Overwrites

the box. If the cell contents is highlighted, type in the desired value. The

overwrite will reflect the change. You cannot change the values of the drop-

down boxes.

When changes to the overwrites have been completed, click the OK button to

close the form. The program then changes all of the overwrite items whose

associated check boxes are checked for the selected members. You must click

the OK button for the changes to be accepted by the program. If you click the

Cancel button to exit the form, any changes made to the overwrites are ig-

nored and the form is closed.

Resetting Concrete Frame Overwrites to Default Values

Use the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Reset All Overwrites

command to reset all of the steel frame overwrites. All current design results

will be deleted when this command is executed.

Important note about resetting overwrites: The program defaults for the

overwrite items are built into the program. The concrete frame overwrite val-

ues that were in a .edb file that you used to initialize your model may be dif-

ferent from the built-in program default values. When you reset overwrites,

the program resets the overwrite values to its built-in values, not to the val-

ues that were in the .edb file used to initialize the model.

Design Load Combinations Technical Note 18 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN ACI-318-99

Technical Note 18

Design Load Combinations

The design load combinations are the various combinations of the prescribed

load cases for which the structure needs to be checked. For the ACI 318-99

code, if a structure is subjected to dead load (DL) and live load (LL) only, the

stress check may need only one load combination, namely 1.4 DL + 1.7 LL

(ACI 9.2.1). However, in addition to the dead and live loads, if the structure is

subjected to wind (WL) and earthquake (EL) loads and considering that wind

and earthquake forces are reversible, the following load combinations should

be considered (ACI 9.2).

1.4 DL

1.4 DL + 1.7 LL (ACI 9.2.1)

0.9 DL ± 1.3 WL

0.75 (1.4 DL + 1.7 LL ± 1.7 WL) (ACI 9.2.2)

0.9 DL ± 1.3 * 1.1 EL

0.75 (1.4 DL + 1.7 LL ± 1.7 * 1.1 EL) (ACI 9.2.3)

These are also the default design load combinations in the program whenever

the ACI 318-99 code is used. The user is warned that the above load combi-

nations involving seismic loads consider service-level seismic forces. Different

load factors may apply with strength-level seismic forces (ACI R9.2.3).

Live load reduction factors can be applied to the member forces of the live

load condition on an element-by-element basis to reduce the contribution of

the live load to the factored loading. See Concrete Frame Design ACI 318-99

Technical Note 17 Overwrites for more information.

Strength Reduction Factors Technical Note 19 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN ACI-318-99

Technical Note 19

Strength Reduction Factors

The strength reduction factors, ϕ, are applied on the nominal strength to ob-

tain the design strength provided by a member. The ϕ factors for flexure, ax-

ial force, shear, and torsion are as follows:

ϕ = 0.90 for flexure (ACI 9.3.2.1)

ϕ = 0.90 for axial tension (ACI 9.3.2.2)

ϕ = 0.90 for axial tension and flexure (ACI 9.3.2.2)

ϕ = 0.75 for axial compression, and axial compression

and flexure (spirally reinforced column) (ACI 9.3.2.2)

ϕ = 0.70 for axial compression, and axial compression

and flexure (tied column) (ACI 9.3.2.2)

ϕ = 0.85 for shear and torsion (ACI 9.3.2.3)

Overview Technical Note 20 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN ACI-318-99

Technical Note 20

Column Design

This Technical Note describes how the program checks column capacity or de-

signs reinforced concrete columns when the ACI-318-99 code is selected.

Overview

The program can be used to check column capacity or to design columns. If

you define the geometry of the reinforcing bar configuration of each concrete

column section, the program will check the column capacity. Alternatively, the

program can calculate the amount of reinforcing required to design the col-

umn. The design procedure for the reinforced concrete columns of the struc-

ture involves the following steps:

Generate axial force/biaxial moment interaction surfaces for all of the dif-

ferent concrete section types of the model. A typical biaxial interaction

surface is shown in Figure 1. When the steel is undefined, the program

generates the interaction surfaces for the range of allowable reinforce-

ment 1 to 8 percent for Ordinary and Intermediate moment resisting

frames (ACI 10.9.1) and 1 to 6 percent for Special moment resisting

frames (ACI 21.4.3.1).

Calculate the capacity ratio or the required reinforcing area for the fac-

tored axial force and biaxial (or uniaxial) bending moments obtained from

each loading combination at each station of the column. The target capac-

ity ratio is taken as one when calculating the required reinforcing area.

Design the column shear reinforcement.

The following four sections describe in detail the algorithms associated with

this process.

Column Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99

Technical Note 20 - 2 Generation of Biaxial Interaction Surfaces

Figure 1 A Typical Column Interaction Surface

Generation of Biaxial Interaction Surfaces

The column capacity interaction volume is numerically described by a series

of discrete points that are generated on the three-dimensional interaction

failure surface. In addition to axial compression and biaxial bending, the for-

mulation allows for axial tension and biaxial bending considerations. A typical

interaction diagram is shown in Figure 1.

The coordinates of these points are determined by rotating a plane of linear

strain in three dimensions on the section of the column. See Figure 2. The

Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Column Design

Generation of Biaxial Interaction Surfaces Technical Note 20 - 3

linear strain diagram limits the maximum concrete strain, ε

c

, at the extremity

of the section, to 0.003 (ACI 10.2.3).

The formulation is based consistently upon the general principles of ultimate

strength design (ACI 10.3), and allows for any doubly symmetric rectangular,

square, or circular column section.

The stress in the steel is given by the product of the steel strain and the steel

modulus of elasticity, ε

s

E

s

, and is limited to the yield stress of the steel, f

y

(ACI 10.2.4). The area associated with each reinforcing bar is assumed to be

placed at the actual location of the center of the bar and the algorithm does

not assume any further simplifications with respect to distributing the area of

steel over the cross section of the column, such as an equivalent steel tube or

cylinder. See Figure 3.

The concrete compression stress block is assumed to be rectangular, with a

stress value of 0.85

'

c

f (ACI 10.2.7.1). See Figure 3. The interaction algorithm

provides correction to account for the concrete area that is displaced by the

reinforcement in the compression zone.

The effects of the strength reduction factor, ϕ, are included in the generation

of the interaction surfaces. The maximum compressive axial load is limited to

ϕP

n(max)

, where

ϕP

n(max)

= 0.85ϕ[0.85

'

c

f (A

g

-A

st

)+f

y

A

st

] spiral column, (ACI 10.3.5.1)

ϕP

n(max)

= 0.80ϕ[0.85

'

c

f (A

g

-A

st

)+f

y

A

st

] tied column, (ACI 10.3.5.2)

ϕ = 0.70 for tied columns, and (ACI 9.3.2.2)

ϕ = 0.75 for spirally reinforced columns. (ACI 9.3.2.2)

The value of ϕ used in the interaction diagram varies from ϕ(compression) to

ϕ(flexure) based on the axial load. For low values of axial load, ϕ is increased

linearly from ϕ(compression) to ϕ(flexure) as the ϕP

n

decreases from the

smaller of ϕP

b

or 0.1

'

c

f A

g

to zero, where ϕP

b

is the axial force at the balanced

condition. The ϕ factor used in calculating ϕP

n

and ϕP

b

is the ϕ(compression).

In cases involving axial tension, ϕ is always ϕ(flexure), which is 0.9 by default

(ACI 9.3.2.2).

Column Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99

Technical Note 20 - 4 Generation of Biaxial Interaction Surfaces

Figure 2 Idealized Strain Distribution for Generation of Interaction Source

Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Column Design

Calculate Column Capacity Ratio Technical Note 20 - 5

Figure 3 Idealization of Stress and Strain Distribution in a Column Section

Calculate Column Capacity Ratio

The column capacity ratio is calculated for each load combination at each out-

put station of each column. The following steps are involved in calculating the

capacity ratio of a particular column for a particular load combination at a

particular location:

Determine the factored moments and forces from the analysis load cases

and the specified load combination factors to give P

u

, M

ux

, and M

uy

.

Determine the moment magnification factors for the column moments.

Apply the moment magnification factors to the factored moments. Deter-

mine whether the point, defined by the resulting axial load and biaxial

moment set, lies within the interaction volume.

The factored moments and corresponding magnification factors depend on the

identification of the individual column as either “sway” or “non-sway.”

The following three sections describe in detail the algorithms associated with

this process.

Column Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99

Technical Note 20 - 6 Calculate Column Capacity Ratio

Determine Factored Moments and Forces

The factored loads for a particular load combination are obtained by applying

the corresponding load factors to all the load cases, giving P

u

, M

ux

, and M

uy

.

The factored moments are further increased for non-sway columns, if re-

quired, to obtain minimum eccentricities of (0.6+0.03h) inches, where h is

the dimension of the column in the corresponding direction (ACI 10.12.3.2).

Determine Moment Magnification Factors

The moment magnification factors are calculated separately for sway (overall

stability effect), δ

s

and for non-sway (individual column stability effect), δ

ns

.

Also, the moment magnification factors in the major and minor directions are

in general different (ACI 10.0, R10.13).

The moment obtained from analysis is separated into two components: the

sway (M

s

) and the non-sway (M

ns

) components. The non-sway components,

which are identified by “ns” subscripts, are predominantly caused by gravity

load. The sway components are identified by the “s” subscripts. The sway

moments are predominantly caused by lateral loads, and are related to the

cause of side sway.

For individual columns or column-members in a floor, the magnified moments

about two axes at any station of a column can be obtained as

M = M

ns

+ δ

s

M

s

. (ACI 10.13.3)

The factor δ

s

is the moment magnification factor for moments causing side

sway. The moment magnification factors for sway moments, δ

s

, is taken as 1

because the component moments M

s

and M

ns

are obtained from a “second or-

der elastic (P-delta) analysis” (ACI R10.10, 10.10.1, R10.13, 10.13.4.1).

The program assumes that it performs a P-delta analysis and, therefore, mo-

ment magnification factor δ

s

for moments causing side-sway is taken as unity

(ACI 10.10.2). For the P-delta analysis, the load should correspond to a load

combination of 1.4 dead load + 1.7 live load (ACI 10.13.6). See also White

and Hajjar (1991). The user should use reduction factors for the moment of

inertias in the program as specified in ACI 10.11. The moment of inertia re-

duction for sustained lateral load involves a factor β

d

(ACI 10.11). This β

d

for

sway frame in second-order analysis is different from the one that is defined

later for non-sway moment magnification (ACI 10.0, R10.12.3, R10.13.4.1).

The default moment of inertia factor in this program is 1.

Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Column Design

Calculate Column Capacity Ratio Technical Note 20 - 7

The computed moments are further amplified for individual column stability

effect (ACI 10.12.3, 10.13.5) by the nonsway moment magnification factor,

δ

ns

, as follows:

M

c

= δ

ns

M, where (ACI 10.12.3)

M

c

is the factored moment to be used in design.

The non-sway moment magnification factor, δ

ns

, associated with the major or

minor direction of the column is given by (ACI 10.12.3)

δ

ns

=

c

u

m

P

P

C

75 . 0

1 −

≤ 1.0, where (ACI 10.12.3)

C

m

= 0.6 +0.4

b

a

M

M

≥ 0.4, (ACI 10.12.3.1)

M

a

and M

b

are the moments at the ends of the column, and M

b

is

numerically larger than M

a

. M

a

/ M

b

is positive for single curvature

bending and negative for double curvature bending. The above ex-

pression of C

m

is valid if there is no transverse load applied between

the supports. If transverse load is present on the span, or the length

is overwritten, C

m

=1. The user can overwrite C

m

on an element-by-

element basis.

P

c

=

2

2

) (

u

kl

EI π

, where (ACI 10.12.3)

k is conservatively taken as 1; however, the program allows the

user to override this value (ACI 10.12.1).

l

u

is the unsupported length of the column for the direction of

bending considered. The two unsupported lengths are l

22

and l

33

,

corresponding to instability in the minor and major directions of

the element, respectively. See Figure 4. These are the lengths

Column Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99

Technical Note 20 - 8 Calculate Column Capacity Ratio

Figure 4 Axes of Bending and Unsupported Length

between the support points of the element in the corresponding

directions.

EI is associated with a particular column direction:

EI =

d

g c

I E

β + 1

4 . 0

, where (ACI 10.12.3)

maximum factored axial sustained (dead) load

β

d

=

maximum factored axial total load

(ACI 10.0,R10.12.3)

The magnification factor, δ

ns

, must be a positive number and greater than

one. Therefore, P

u

must be less than 0.75P

c

. If P

u

is found to be greater than

or equal to 0.75P

c

, a failure condition is declared.

Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Column Design

Calculate Column Capacity Ratio Technical Note 20 - 9

The above calculations are performed for major and minor directions sepa-

rately. That means that δ

s

, δ

ns

, C

m

, k, l

u

, EI, and P

c

assume different values for

major and minor directions of bending.

If the program assumptions are not satisfactory for a particular member, the

user can explicitly specify values of δ

s

and δ

ns

.

Determine Capacity Ratio

As a measure of the stress condition of the column, a capacity ratio is calcu-

lated. The capacity ratio is basically a factor that gives an indication of the

stress condition of the column with respect to the capacity of the column.

Before entering the interaction diagram to check the column capacity, the

moment magnification factors are applied to the factored loads to obtain P

u

,

M

ux

, and M

uy

. The point (P

u

, M

ux

, M

uy

) is then placed in the interaction space

shown as point L in Figure 5. If the point lies within the interaction volume,

the column capacity is adequate; however, if the point lies outside the inter-

action volume, the column is overstressed.

This capacity ratio is achieved by plotting the point L and determining the lo-

cation of point C. The point C is defined as the point where the line OL (if ex-

tended outwards) will intersect the failure surface. This point is determined by

three-dimensional linear interpolation between the points that define the fail-

ure surface. See Figure 5. The capacity ratio, CR, is given by the ratio

OC

OL

.

If OL = OC (or CR=1), the point lies on the interaction surface and the

column is stressed to capacity.

If OL < OC (or CR<1), the point lies within the interaction volume and the

column capacity is adequate.

If OL > OC (or CR>1), the point lies outside the interaction volume and

the column is overstressed.

The maximum of all the values of CR calculated from each load combination is

reported for each check station of the column along with the controlling P

u

,

M

ux

, and M

uy

set and associated load combination number.

Column Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99

Technical Note 20 - 10 Required Reinforcing Area

Figure 5 Geometric Representation of Column Capacity Ratio

Required Reinforcing Area

If the reinforcing area is not defined, the program computes the reinforce-

ment that will give a column capacity ratio of one, calculated as described in

the previous section entitled "Calculate Column Capacity Ratio."

Design Column Shear Reinforcement

The shear reinforcement is designed for each load combination in the major

and minor directions of the column. The following steps are involved in de-

signing the shear reinforcing for a particular column for a particular load com-

bination resulting from shear forces in a particular direction:

Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Column Design

Design Column Shear Reinforcement Technical Note 20 - 11

Determine the factored forces acting on the section, P

u

and V

u

. Note that

P

u

is needed for the calculation of V

c

.

Determine the shear force, V

c

, that can be resisted by concrete alone.

Calculate the reinforcement steel required to carry the balance.

For Special and Intermediate moment resisting frames (Ductile frames), the

shear design of the columns is also based on the Probable moment and nomi-

nal moment capacities of the members, respectively, in addition to the fac-

tored moments. Effects of the axial forces on the column moment capacities

are included in the formulation.

The following three sections describe in detail the algorithms associated with

this process.

Determine Section Forces

In the design of the column shear reinforcement of an Ordinary moment

resisting concrete frame, the forces for a particular load combination,

namely, the column axial force, P

u

, and the column shear force, V

u

, in a

particular direction are obtained by factoring the program analysis load

cases with the corresponding load combination factors.

In the shear design of Special moment resisting frames (i.e., seismic

design), the column is checked for capacity shear in addition to the re-

quirement for the Ordinary moment resisting frames. The capacity shear

force in a column, V

p

, in a particular direction is calculated from the prob-

able moment capacities of the column associated with the factored axial

force acting on the column.

For each load combination, the factored axial load, P

u

, is calculated. Then,

the positive and negative moment capacities,

+

u

M and

−

u

M , of the column

in a particular direction under the influence of the axial force P

u

is calcu-

lated using the uniaxial interaction diagram in the corresponding direction.

The design shear force, V

u

, is then given by (ACI 21.4.5.1)

V

u

= V

p

+ V

D+L

(ACI 21.4.5.1)

where, V

p

is the capacity shear force obtained by applying the calculated

probable ultimate moment capacities at the two ends of the column acting

Column Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99

Technical Note 20 - 12 Design Column Shear Reinforcement

in two opposite directions. Therefore, V

p

is the maximum of

1

P

V and

2

P

V ,

where

1

P

V =

L

M M

J I

+ −

+

, and

2

P

V =

L

M M

J I

− +

+

, where

− +

I I

M M , , = Positive and negative moment capacities at end I of the

column using a steel yield stress value of αf

y

and no ϕ

factors (ϕ = 1.0),

− +

J J

M M , , = Positive and negative moment capacities at end J of the

column using a steel yield stress value of αf

y

and no ϕ

factors (ϕ = 1.0), and

L = Clear span of column.

For Special moment resisting frames α is taken as 1.25 (ACI 10.0,

R21.4.5.1). V

D+L

is the contribution of shear force from the in-span distri-

bution of gravity loads. For most of the columns, it is zero.

For Intermediate moment resisting frames, the shear capacity of the

column is also checked for the capacity shear based on the nominal mo-

ment capacities at the ends and the factored gravity loads, in addition to

the check required for Ordinary moment resisting frames. The design

shear force is taken to be the minimum of that based on the nominal (ϕ =

1.0) moment capacity and modified factored shear force. The procedure

for calculating nominal moment capacity is the same as that for comput-

ing the probable moment capacity for special moment resisting frames,

except that α is taken equal to 1 rather than 1.25 (ACI 21.10.3.a,

R21.10). The modified factored shear forces are based on the specified

load factors, except the earthquake load factors are doubled (ACI

21.10.3.b).

Determine Concrete Shear Capacity

Given the design force set P

u

and V

u

, the shear force carried by the concrete,

V

c

, is calculated as follows:

Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Column Design

Design Column Shear Reinforcement Technical Note 20 - 13

If the column is subjected to axial compression, i.e., P

u

is positive,

V

c

= 2

+

g

u

c

A

P

f

000 , 2

1

'

A

cv

, where (ACI 11.3.1.2)

'

c

f ≤ 100 psi, and (ACI 11.1.2)

V

c

≤ 3.5

'

c

f

+

g

u

A

P

500

1 A

cv

. (ACI 11.3.2.2)

The term P

u

/ A

g

must have psi units. A

cv

is the effective shear area, which

is shown shaded in Figure 6. For circular columns, A

cv

is taken to be equal

to the gross area of the section (ACI 11.3.3, R11.3.3).

If the column is subjected to axial tension, P

u

is negative

V

c

= 2

'

c

f

+

g

u

A

P

500

1 A

cv

≥ 0 (ACI 11.3.2.3)

For Special moment resisting concrete frame design, V

c

is set to zero

if the factored axial compressive force, P

u

, including the earthquake effect,

is small (P

u

<

'

c

f A

g

/ 20) and if the shear force contribution from earth-

quake, V

E

, is more than half of the total factored maximum shear force

over the length of the member V

u

(V

E

≥ 0.5V

u

) (ACI 21.4.5.2).

Determine Required Shear Reinforcement

Given V

u

and V

c

, the required shear reinforcement in the form of stirrups or

ties within a spacing, s, is given for rectangular and circular columns by

A

v

=

d f

s V V

ys

c u

) / ( − ϕ

, for rectangular columns and (ACI 11.5.6.1, 11.5.6.2)

A

v

=

) 8 . 0 (

) / (

D f

s V V

ys

c u

− ϕ

, for circular columns. (ACI 11.5.6.3, 11.3.3)

V

u

is limited by the following relationship.

(V

u

/ ϕ-V

c

) ≤ 8

'

c

f A

cv

(ACI 11.5.6.9)

Column Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99

Technical Note 20 - 14 Design Column Shear Reinforcement

Figure 6 Shear Stress Area, A

cv

Otherwise, redimensioning of the concrete section is required. Here ϕ, the

strength reduction factor, is 0.85 (ACI 9.3.2.3). The maximum of all the cal-

culated A

v

values obtained from each load combination are reported for the

major and minor directions of the column, along with the controlling shear

force and associated load combination label.

The column shear reinforcement requirements reported by the program are

based purely on shear strength consideration. Any minimum stirrup require-

ments to satisfy spacing considerations or transverse reinforcement volumet-

ric considerations must be investigated independently of the program by the

user.

Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Column Design

Reference Technical Note 20 - 15

Reference

White, D.W. and J.F. Hajjar. 1991. Application of Second-Order Elastic Analy-

sis in LRFD: Research to Practice. Engineering Journal. American In-

stitute of Steel Construction, Inc. Vol. 28. No. 4.

Overview Technical Note 21 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN ACI-318-99

Technical Note 21

Beam Design

This Technical Note describes how this program completes beam design when

the ACI 318-99 code is selected. The program calculates and reports the re-

quired areas of steel for flexure and shear based on the beam moments,

shears, load combination factors and other criteria described herein.

Overview

In the design of concrete beams, the program calculates and reports the re-

quired areas of steel for flexure and shear based on the beam moments,

shears, load combination factors, and other criteria described below. The re-

inforcement requirements are calculated at a user-defined number of

check/design stations along the beam span.

All beams are designed for major direction flexure and shear only.

Effects resulting from any axial forces, minor direction bending, and

torsion that may exist in the beams must be investigated independ-

ently by the user.

The beam design procedure involves the following steps:

Design beam flexural reinforcement

Design beam shear reinforcement

Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement

The beam top and bottom flexural steel is designed at check/design stations

along the beam span. The following steps are involved in designing the flex-

ural reinforcement for the major moment for a particular beam for a particu-

lar section:

Determine the maximum factored moments

Determine the reinforcing steel

Beam Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99

Technical Note 21 - 2 Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement

Determine Factored Moments

In the design of flexural reinforcement of Special, Intermediate, or Ordinary

moment resisting concrete frame beams, the factored moments for each load

combination at a particular beam section are obtained by factoring the corre-

sponding moments for different load cases with the corresponding load fac-

tors.

The beam section is then designed for the maximum positive

+

u

M and maxi-

mum negative

−

u

M factored moments obtained from all of the load combina-

tions

.

Negative beam moments produce top steel. In such cases, the beam is al-

ways designed as a rectangular section. Positive beam moments produce

bottom steel. In such cases, the beam may be designed as a Rectangular- or

a T-beam.

Determine Required Flexural Reinforcement

In the flexural reinforcement design process, the program calculates both the

tension and compression reinforcement. Compression reinforcement is added

when the applied design moment exceeds the maximum moment capacity of

a singly reinforced section. The user has the option of avoiding the compres-

sion reinforcement by increasing the effective depth, the width, or the grade

of concrete.

The design procedure is based on the simplified rectangular stress block as

shown in Figure 1 (ACI 10.2). It is assumed that the compression carried by

concrete is less than 0.75 times that which can be carried at the balanced

condition (ACI 10.3.3). When the applied moment exceeds the moment ca-

pacity at this designed balanced condition, the area of compression rein-

forcement is calculated assuming that the additional moment will be carried

by compression and additional tension reinforcement.

The design procedure used by this program for both rectangular and flanged

sections (L- and T-beams) is summarized below. It is assumed that the de-

sign ultimate axial force does not exceed 0.1

'

c

f A

g

(ACI 10.3.3); hence, all the

beams are designed for major direction flexure and shear only.

Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Beam Design

Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement Technical Note 21 - 3

Figure 1 Design of Rectangular Beam Section

Design for Rectangular Beam

In designing for a factored negative or positive moment, M

u

(i.e., designing

top or bottom steel), the depth of the compression block is given by a (see

Figure 1), where,

a = d -

b f

M

d

c

u

ϕ

−

1

2

85 . 0

2

, (ACI 10.2.7.1)

where, the value of ϕ is 0.90 (ACI 9.3.2.1) in the above and the following

equations. Also β

1

and c

b

are calculated as follows:

β

1

= 0.85-0.05

(

(

,

\

,

,

(

j

−

000 , 1

000 , 4

'

c

f

, 0.65 ≤ β

1

≤ 0.85, (ACI 10.2.7.3)

c

b

= d

f E

E

y s c

s c

+ ε

ε

=

y

f + 000 , 87

000 , 87

d. (ACI 10.2.3, 10.2.4)

Beam Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99

Technical Note 21 - 4 Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement

The maximum allowed depth of the compression block is given by

a

max

= 0.75β

1

c

b

. (ACI 10.2.7.1, 10.3.3)

If a ≤ a

max

, the area of tensile steel reinforcement is then given by

A

s

=

(

,

\

,

(

j

− ϕ

2

a

d f

M

y

u

.

This steel is to be placed at the bottom if M

u

is positive, or at the top if M

u

is negative.

If a > a

max

, compression reinforcement is required (ACI 10.3.3) and is cal-

culated as follows:

− The compressive force developed in concrete alone is given by

C = 0.85

'

c

f ba

max

, and (ACI 10.2.7.1)

the moment resisted by concrete compression and tensile steel is

M

uc

= C

(

(

,

\

,

,

(

j

−

2

max

a

d ϕ.

− Therefore the moment resisted by compression steel and tensile steel

is

M

us

= M

u

- M

uc

.

− So the required compression steel is given by

'

s

A =

ϕ − ) ' (

'

d d f

M

s

us

, where

'

s

f = 0.003E

s

]

]

]

,

¸

, −

c

d c '

. (ACI 10.2.4)

− The required tensile steel for balancing the compression in concrete is

Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Beam Design

Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement Technical Note 21 - 5

A

s1

=

ϕ

]

]

]

,

¸

,

−

2

max

a

d f

M

y

uc

, and

the tensile steel for balancing the compression in steel is given by

A

s2

=

ϕ − ) ' ( d d f

M

y

us

.

− Therefore, the total tensile reinforcement, A

s

= A

s1

+ A

s2

, and total

compression reinforcement is

'

s

A . A

s

is to be placed at bottom and

'

s

A

is to be placed at top if M

u

is positive, and vice versa if M

u

is negative.

Design for T-Beam

In designing for a factored negative moment, M

u

(i.e., designing top steel),

the calculation of the steel area is exactly the same as above, i.e., no T-Beam

data is to be used. See Figure 2. If M

u

> 0, the depth of the compression

block is given by

a = d -

f c

u

b f

M

d

ϕ

−

'

2

85 . 0

2

.

The maximum allowed depth of compression block is given by

a

max

= 0.75β

1

c

b

. (ACI 10.2.7.1, 10.3.3)

• If a ≤ d

s

, the subsequent calculations for A

s

are exactly the same as previ-

ously defined for the rectangular section design. However, in this case the

width of the compression flange is taken as the width of the beam for

analysis. Compression reinforcement is required if a > a

max

.

• If a > d

s

, calculation for A

s

is performed in two parts. The first part is for

balancing the compressive force from the flange, C

f

, and the second part

is for balancing the compressive force from the web, C

w

, as shown in Fig-

ure 2. C

f

is given by

C

f

= 0.85

'

c

f (b

f

- b

w

)d

s

.

Beam Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99

Technical Note 21 - 6 Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement

Figure 2 Design of a T-Beam Section

Therefore, A

s1

=

y

f

f

C

and the portion of M

u

that is resisted by the flange is

given by

M

uf

= C

f

(

(

,

\

,

,

(

j

−

2

s

d

d ϕ.

Again, the value for ϕ is ϕ(flexure), which is 0.90 by default. Therefore,

the balance of the moment, M

u

to be carried by the web is given by

M

uw

= M

u

- M

uf

.

The web is a rectangular section of dimensions b

w

and d, for which the de-

sign depth of the compression block is recalculated as

a

1

= d -

w

i

c

uw

b f

M

d

ϕ

−

85 . 0

2

2

.

If a

1

≤ a

max

, the area of tensile steel reinforcement is then given by

A

s2

=

(

(

,

\

,

,

(

j

− ϕ

2

1

a

d f

M

y

uw

, and

Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Beam Design

Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement Technical Note 21 - 7

A

s

= A

s1

+ A

s2

.

This steel is to be placed at the bottom of the T-beam.

If a

1

> a

max

, compression reinforcement is required (ACI 10.3.3) and is

calculated as follows:

− The compressive force in web concrete alone is given by

C = 0.85

'

c

f ba

max

. (ACI 10.2.7.1)

− Therefore, the moment resisted by concrete web and tensile steel

is

M

uc

= C ϕ

(

(

,

\

,

,

(

j

−

2

max

a

d , and

the moment resisted by compression steel and tensile steel is

M

us

= M

uw

- M

uc

.

− Therefore, the compression steel is computed as

'

s

A =

ϕ − ) ' (

'

d d f

M

s

us

, where

'

s

f = 0.003E

s

]

]

]

,

¸

, −

c

d c '

. (ACI 10.2.4)

− The tensile steel for balancing compression in web concrete is

A

s2

=

ϕ − )

2

(

max

a

d f

M

y

uc

, and

the tensile steel for balancing compression in steel is

A

s3

=

ϕ − ) ' ( d d f

M

y

us

.

Beam Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99

Technical Note 21 - 8 Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement

− The total tensile reinforcement, A

s

= A

s1

+ A

s2

+ A

s3

, and total

compression reinforcement is

'

s

A . A

s

is to be placed at bottom and

'

s

A is to be placed at top.

Minimum Tensile Reinforcement

The minimum flexural tensile steel provided in a rectangular section in an Or-

dinary moment resisting frame is given by the minimum of the two following

limits:

A

s

≥ max

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

d b

f

d b

f

f

w

y

w

y

c

200

and

3

'

or (ACI 10.5.1)

A

s

≥ (4/3)A

s(required)

. (ACI 10.5.3)

Special Consideration for Seismic Design

For Special moment resisting concrete frames (seismic design), the beam de-

sign satisfies the following additional conditions (see also Table 1):

The minimum longitudinal reinforcement shall be provided at both the top

and bottom. Any of the top and bottom reinforcement shall not be less

than A

s(min)

(ACI 21.3.2.1).

A

s(min)

≥ max

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

d b

f

d b

f

f

w

y

w

y

c

200

and

3

'

or (ACI 10.5.1)

A

s(min)

≥

3

4

A

s(required)

. (ACI 10.5.3)

The beam flexural steel is limited to a maximum given by

A

s

≤ 0.025 b

w

d. (ACI 21.3.2.1)

At any end (support) of the beam, the beam positive moment capacity

(i.e., associated with the bottom steel) would not be less than 1/2 of the

beam negative moment capacity (i.e., associated with the top steel) at

that end (ACI 21.3.2.2).

Neither the negative moment capacity nor the positive moment capacity

at any of the sections within the beam would be less than 1/4 of the

Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Beam Design

Design Beam Shear Reinforcement Technical Note 21 - 9

maximum of positive or negative moment capacities of any of the beam

end (support) stations (ACI 21.3.2.2).

For Intermediate moment resisting concrete frames (i.e., seismic design), the

beam design would satisfy the following conditions:

At any support of the beam, the beam positive moment capacity would

not be less than 1/3 of the beam negative moment capacity at that end

(ACI 21.10.4.1).

Neither the negative moment capacity nor the positive moment capacity

at any of the sections within the beam would be less than 1/5 of the

maximum of positive or negative moment capacities of any of the beam

end (support) stations (ACI 21.10.4.1).

Design Beam Shear Reinforcement

The shear reinforcement is designed for each load combination at a user de-

fined number of stations along the beam span. The following steps are in-

volved in designing the shear reinforcement for a particular beam for a par-

ticular load combination at a particular station due to the beam major shear:

• Determine the factored shear force, V

u

.

• Determine the shear force, V

c

, that can be resisted by the concrete.

• Determine the reinforcement steel required to carry the balance.

For Special and Intermediate moment resisting frames (ductile frames), the

shear design of the beams is also based upon the probable and nominal mo-

ment capacities of the members, respectively, in addition to the factored load

design.

The following three sections describe in detail the algorithms associated with

this process.

Beam Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99

Technical Note 21 - 10 Design Beam Shear Reinforcement

Table 1 Design Criteria Table

Type of

Check/

Design

Ordinary Moment

Resisting Frames

(non-Seismic)

Intermediate Moment

Resisting Frames

(Seismic)

Special Moment

Resisting Frames

(Seismic)

Column

Check

(interaction)

NLD

a

Combinations NLD

a

Combinations NLD

a

Combinations

Column

Design

(interaction)

NLD

a

Combinations

1% < ρ < 8%

NLD

a

Combinations

1% < ρ < 8%

NLD

a

Combinations

α = 1.0

1% < ρ < 6%

Column

Shears

NLD

a

Combinations

Modified NLD

a

Combinations

(earthquake loads doubled)

Column capacity

ϕ = 1.0 and α = 1.0

NLD

a

Combinations

Column shear capacity

ϕ = 1.0 and α = 1.25

Beam

Design

Flexure

NLD

a

Combinations NLD

a

Combinations

NLD

a

Combinations

ρ ≤ 0.025

ρ ≥

y

c

f

f

'

3

, ρ ≥

y

f

200

Beam Min.

Moment

Override

Check

No Requirement

END u uEND

M M

− +

≥

3

1

¦ ¦

END u u uSPAN

M M M

− + +

≥ , max

5

1

¦ ¦

END u u uSPAN

M M M

− + −

≥ , max

5

1

END

u uEND

M M

− +

≥

2

1

¦ ¦

END u u uSPAN

M M M

− + +

≥ , max

4

1

¦ ¦

END u u uSPAN

M M M

− − −

≥ , max

4

1

Beam

Design

Shear

NLD

a

Combinations

Modified NLD

a

Combinations

(earthquake loads doubled)

Beam Capacity Shear (Vp)

with α = 1.0 and ϕ = 1.0

plus VD+L

NLD

a

Combinations

Beam Capacity Shear (Vp)

with α = 1.25 and ϕ = 1.0

plus VD+L

Vc = 0

Joint Design No Requirement No Requirement Checked for shear

Beam/Column

Capacity

Ratio

No Requirement No Requirement Reported in output file

NLD

a

= Number of specified loading

Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Beam Design

Design Beam Shear Reinforcement Technical Note 21 - 11

Determine Shear Force and Moment

• In the design of the beam shear reinforcement of an Ordinary moment

resisting concrete frame, the shear forces and moments for a particular

load combination at a particular beam section are obtained by factoring

the associated shear forces and moments with the corresponding load

combination factors.

• In the design of Special moment resisting concrete frames (i.e.,

seismic design), the shear capacity of the beam is also checked for the

capacity shear resulting from the probable moment capacities at the ends

and the factored gravity load. This check is performed in addition to the

design check required for Ordinary moment resisting frames. The capacity

shear force, V

p

, is calculated from the probable moment capacities of each

end of the beam and the gravity shear forces. The procedure for calculat-

ing the design shear force in a beam from probable moment capacity is

the same as that described for a column in section “Design Column Shear

Reinforcement” of Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 Technical Note 20

Column Design. See also Table 1 for details.

The design shear force V

u

is then given by (ACI 21.3.4.1)

V

u

= V

p

+ V

D+L

(ACI 21.3.4.1)

where V

p

is the capacity shear force obtained by applying the calculated

probable ultimate moment capacities at the two ends of the beams acting

in two opposite directions. Therefore, V

p

is the maximum of

1

P

V and

2

P

V ,

where

1

P

V =

L

M M

J I

+ −

+

, and

2

P

V =

L

M M

J I

− +

+

, where

−

I

M = Moment capacity at end I, with top steel in tension, using a

steel yield stress value of αf

y

and no ϕ factors (ϕ = 1.0),

+

J

M = Moment capacity at end J, with bottom steel in tension, using

a steel yield stress value of αf

y

and no ϕ factors (ϕ = 1.0),

Beam Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99

Technical Note 21 - 12 Design Beam Shear Reinforcement

+

I

M = Moment capacity at end I, with bottom steel in tension, using

a steel yield stress value of αf

y

and no ϕ factors (ϕ = 1.0),

−

J

M = Moment capacity at end J, with top steel in tension, using a

steel yield stress value of αf

y

and no ϕ factors (ϕ = 1.0), and

L = Clear span of beam.

For Special moment resisting frames α is taken as 1.25 (ACI 21.0,

R21.3.4.1). V

D+L

is the contribution of shear force from the in-span distri-

bution of gravity loads.

• For Intermediate moment resisting frames, the shear capacity of the

beam is also checked for the capacity shear based on the nominal moment

capacities at the ends and the factored gravity loads, in addition to the

check required for Ordinary moment resisting frames. The design shear

force in beams is taken to be the minimum of that based on the nominal

moment capacity and modified factored shear force. The procedure for

calculating nominal (ϕ = 1.0) moment capacity is the same as that for

computing the probable moment capacity for Special moment resisting

frames, except that α is taken equal to 1 rather than 1.25 (ACI 21.10.3.a,

R21.10). The modified factored shear forces are based on the specified

load factors, except the earthquake load factors are doubled (ACI

21.10.3.b). The computation of the design shear force in a beam of an

Intermediate moment resisting frame is the same as described for col-

umns in section “Determine Section Forces” of Concrete Frame Design

ACI318-99 Technical Note 20 Column Design. See also Table 1 for details.

Determine Concrete Shear Capacity

The allowable concrete shear capacity is given by

V

c

= 2

'

c

f b

w

d. (ACI 11.3.1.1)

For Special moment resisting frame concrete design, V

c

is set to zero if both

the factored axial compressive force, including the earthquake effect P

u

, is

less than

'

c

f A

g

/20 and the shear force contribution from earthquake V

E

is

more than half of the total maximum shear force over the length of the mem-

ber V

u

(i.e., V

E

≥ 0.5V

u

) (ACI 21.3.4.2).

Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Beam Design

Design Beam Shear Reinforcement Technical Note 21 - 13

Determine Required Shear Reinforcement

Given V

u

and V

c

, the required shear reinforcement in area/unit length is cal-

culated as

A

v

=

d f

s V V

ys

c u

) / ( − ϕ

. (ACI 11.5.6.1, 11.5.6.2)

The shear force resisted by steel is limited by

(V

u

/ ϕ - V

c

) ≤ 8

'

c

f bd. (ACI 11.5.6.9)

Otherwise, redimensioning of the concrete section is required. Here, ϕ, the

strength reduction factor for shear, is 0.85 by default (ACI 9.3.2.3). The

maximum of all the calculated A

v

values, obtained from each load combina-

tion, is reported along with the controlling shear force and associated load

combination number.

The beam shear reinforcement requirements displayed by the program are

based purely on shear strength considerations. Any minimum stirrup require-

ments to satisfy spacing and volumetric considerations must be investigated

independently of the program by the user.

Overview Technical Note 22 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN ACI318-99

Technical Note 22

Joint Design

This Technical Note explains how the program performs a rational analysis of

the beam-column panel zone to determine the shear forces that are gener-

ated in a joint. The program then checks this against design shear strength.

Overview

To ensure that the beam-column joint of special moment resisting frames

possesses adequate shear strength, the program performs a rational analysis

of the beam-column panel zone to determine the shear forces that are gener-

ated in the joint. The program then checks this against design shear strength.

Only joints having a column below the joint are designed. The material prop-

erties of the joint are assumed to be the same as those of the column below

the joint.

The joint analysis is completed in the major and the minor directions of the

column. The joint design procedure involves the following steps:

Determine the panel zone design shear force, V

u

h

Determine the effective area of the joint

Check panel zone shear stress

The algorithms associated with these three steps are described in detail in the

following three sections.

Determine the Panel Zone Shear Force

Figure 1 illustrates the free body stress condition of a typical beam-column

intersection for a column direction, major or minor.

Joint Design Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99

Technical Note 22 - 2 Determine the Panel Zone Shear Force

Figure 1 Beam-Column Joint Analysis

Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 Joint Design

Determine the Panel Zone Shear Force Technical Note 22 - 3

The force V

u

h

is the horizontal panel zone shear force that is to be calculated.

The forces that act on the joint are P

u

, V

u

, M

u

L

and M

u

R

. The forces P

u

and V

u

are axial force and shear force, respectively, from the column framing into the

top of the joint. The moments M

u

L

and M

u

R

are obtained from the beams

framing into the joint. The program calculates the joint shear force V

u

h

by re-

solving the moments into C and T forces. Noting that T

L

= C

L

and T

R

= C

R

,

V

u

h

= T

L

+ T

R

- V

u

The location of C or T forces is determined by the direction of the moment.

The magnitude of C or T forces is conservatively determined using basic prin-

ciples of ultimate strength theory, ignoring compression reinforcement as fol-

lows. The program first calculates the maximum compression, C

max

, and the

maximum moment, M

max

, that can be carried by the beam.

bd f C c

'

max

85 . 0

2

max max

d

C M

Then the program conservatively determines C and T forces as follows:

(

(

,

\

,

,

(

j

− −

max

max

) (

1 1

M

M abs

C T C

The program resolves the moments and the C and T forces from beams that

frame into the joint in a direction that is not parallel to the major or minor

directions of the column along the direction that is being investigated, thereby

contributing force components to the analysis. Also, the program calculates

the C and T for the positive and negative moments, considering the fact that

the concrete cover may be different for the direction of moment.

In the design of special moment resisting concrete frames, the evaluation of

the design shear force is based on the moment capacities (with reinforcing

steel overstrength factor, α, and no ϕ factors) of the beams framing into the

joint (ACI 21.5.1.1, UBC 1921.5.1.1). The C and T force are based on these

moment capacities. The program calculates the column shear force V

u

from

the beam moment capacities, as follows:

Joint Design Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99

Technical Note 22 - 4 Determine the Effective Area of Joint

H

M M

V

R

u

L

u

u

+

**See Figure 2. It should be noted that the points of inflection shown on Figure
**

2 are taken as midway between actual lateral support points for the columns.

If there is no column at the top of the joint, the shear force from the top of

the column is taken as zero.

The effects of load reversals, as illustrated in Case 1 and Case 2 of Figure 1,

are investigated and the design is based on the maximum of the joint shears

obtained from the two cases.

Determine the Effective Area of Joint

The joint area that resists the shear forces is assumed always to be rectan-

gular in plan view. The dimensions of the rectangle correspond to the major

and minor dimensions of the column below the joint, except if the beam

framing into the joint is very narrow. The effective width of the joint area to

be used in the calculation is limited to the width of the beam plus the depth of

the column. The area of the joint is assumed not to exceed the area of the

column below. The joint area for joint shear along the major and minor direc-

tions is calculated separately (ACI R21.5.3).

It should be noted that if the beam frames into the joint eccentrically, the

above assumptions may be unconservative and the user should investigate

the acceptability of the particular joint.

Check Panel Zone Shear Stress

The panel zone shear stress is evaluated by dividing the shear force V

u

h

by

the effective area of the joint and comparing it with the following design shear

strengths (ACI 21.5.3, UBC 1921.5.3):

20ϕ

c

f '

for joints confirmed on all four sides

v = 15ϕ

c

f '

for joints confirmed on three faces or on two

opposite faces

¦

12ϕ

c

f '

for all other joints

Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 Joint Design

Determine the Effective Area of Joint Technical Note 22 - 5

where ϕ = 0.85 (by default). (ACI 9.3.2.3, UBC 1909.3.2.3,1909.3.4.1)

A beam that frames into a face of a column at the joint is considered in this

program to provide confinement to the joint if at least three-quarters of the

face of the joint is covered by the framing member (ACI 21.5.3.1, UBC

1921.5.3.1).

Figure 2 Column Shear Force V

u

Joint Design Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99

Technical Note 22 - 6 Beam/Column Flexural Capacity Ratios

For light-weight aggregate concrete, the design shear strength of the joint is

reduced in the program to at least three-quarters of that of the normal weight

concrete by replacing the

'

c

f

with

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦

¦ ' '

,

4 / 3 , min

c c factor cs

f f f (ACI 21.5.3.2, UBC 1921.5.3.2)

For joint design, the program reports the joint shear, the joint shear stress,

the allowable joint shear stress and a capacity ratio.

Beam/Column Flexural Capacity Ratios

At a particular joint for a particular column direction, major or minor, the pro-

gram will calculate the ratio of the sum of the beam moment capacities to the

sum of the column moment capacities (ACI 21.4.2.2).

∑M

e

≥

5

6

∑M

g

(ACI 21.4.2.2)

The capacities are calculated with no reinforcing overstrength factor, α , and

including ϕ factors. The beam capacities are calculated for reversed situations

(Cases 1 and 2) as illustrated in Figure 1 and the maximum summation ob-

tained is used.

The moment capacities of beams that frame into the joint in a direction that is

not parallel to the major or minor direction of the column are resolved along

the direction that is being investigated and the resolved components are

added to the summation.

The column capacity summation includes the column above and the column

below the joint. For each load combination, the axial force, P

u

, in each of the

columns is calculated from the program analysis load combinations. For each

load combination, the moment capacity of each column under the influence of

the corresponding axial load P

u

is then determined separately for the major

and minor directions of the column, using the uniaxial column interaction dia-

gram; see Figure 3. The moment capacities of the two columns are added to

give the capacity summation for the corresponding load combination. The

maximum capacity summations obtained from all of the load combinations is

used for the beam/column capacity ratio.

Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 Joint Design

Beam/Column Flexural Capacity Ratios Technical Note 22 - 7

The beam/column flexural capacity ratios are only reported for Special Mo-

ment-Resisting Frames involving seismic design load combinations. If this ra-

tio is greater than 5/6, a warning message is printed in the output file.

Figure 3 Moment Capacity M

u

at a Given Axial Load P

u

Input Data Technical Note 23 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN ACI318-99

Technical Note 23

Input Data

This Technical Note describes the concrete frame design input data for

ACI318-99. The input can be printed to a printer or to a text file when you

click the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design command. A

printout of the input data provides the user with the opportunity to carefully

review the parameters that have been input into the program and upon which

program design is based. Further information about using the Print Design

Tables form is presented at the end of this Technical Note.

Input Data

The program provides the printout of the input data in a series of tables. The

column headings for input data and a description of what is included in the

columns of the tables are provided in Table 1 of this Technical Note.

Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Input Data

COLUMN HEADING DESCRIPTION

Load Combination Multipliers

Combo Design load combination. See Technical Note 8.

Type

Load type: dead, live, superimposed dead, earthquake, wind,

snow, reduced live load, other.

Case Name of load case.

Factor Load combination scale factor.

Code Preferences

Phi_bending Bending strength reduction factor.

Phi_tension Tensile strength reduction factor.

Phi_compression

(Tied)

Compressive strength reduction factor for tied columns.

Phi_compression (Spi-

ral)

Compressive strength reduction factor for reinforced columns.

Phi_shear Shear strength reduction factor.

Input Data Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99

Technical Note 23 - 2 Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Input Data

Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Input Data

COLUMN HEADING DESCRIPTION

Material Property Data

Material Name Concrete, steel, other.

Material Type Isotropic or orthotropic.

Design Type

Modulus of Elasticity

Poisson's Ratio

Thermal Coeff Coefficient of thermal expansion.

Shear Modulus

Material Property Mass and Weight

Material Name Concrete, steel, other.

Mass Per Unit Vol Used to calculate self-mass of structure.

Weight Per Unit Vol Used to calculate self-weight of structure.

Material Design Data for Concrete Materials

Material Name Concrete, steel, other.

Lightweight Concrete

Concrete FC Concrete compressive strength.

Rebar FY Bending reinforcing steel yield strength.

Rebar FYS Shear reinforcing steel yield strength.

Lightwt Reduc Fact Shear strength reduction factor for light weight concrete; default

= 1.0.

Concrete Column Property Data

Section Label Label applied to section.

Mat Label Material label.

Column Depth

Column Width

Rebar Pattern Layout of main flexural reinforcing steel.

Concrete Cover Minimum clear concrete cover.

Bar Area Area of individual reinforcing bar to be used.

Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 Input Data

Using the Print Design Tables Form Technical Note 23 - 3

Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Input Data

COLUMN HEADING DESCRIPTION

Concrete Column Design Element Information

Story ID Column assigned to story level at top of column.

Column Line Grid line.

Section ID Name of section assigned to column.

Framing Type Lateral or gravity.

RLLF Factor

L_Ratio Major Unbraced length about major axis.

L_Ratio Minor Unbraced length about minor axis.

K Major Effective length factor; default = 1.0.

K Minor Effective length factor; default = 1.0.

Concrete Beam Design Element Information

Story ID Story level at which beam occurs.

Bay ID Grid lines locating beam.

Section ID Section number assigned to beam.

Framing type Lateral or gravity.

RLLF Factor

L_Ratio Major Unbraced length about major axis.

L_Ratio Minor Unbraced length about minor axis.

Using the Print Design Tables Form

To print concrete frame design input data directly to a printer, use the File

menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design command and click the

check box on the Print Design Tables form. Click the OK button to send the

print to your printer. Click the Cancel button rather than the OK button to

cancel the print. Use the File menu > Print Setup command and the

Setup>> button to change printers, if necessary.

To print concrete frame design input data to a file, click the Print to File check

box on the Print Design Tables form. Click the Filename>> button to change

Input Data Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99

Technical Note 23 - 4 Using the Print Design Tables Form

the path or filename. Use the appropriate file extension for the desired format

(e.g., .txt, .xls, .doc). Click the OK buttons on the Open File for Printing Ta-

bles form and the Print Design Tables form to complete the request.

Note:

The File menu > Display Input/Output Text Files command is useful for displaying out-

put that is printed to a text file.

The Append check box allows you to add data to an existing file. The path and

filename of the current file is displayed in the box near the bottom of the Print

Design Tables form. Data will be added to this file. Or use the Filename>>

button to locate another file, and when the Open File for Printing Tables cau-

tion box appears, click Yes to replace the existing file.

If you select a specific frame element(s) before using the File menu > Print

Tables > Concrete Frame Design command, the Selection Only check box

will be checked. The print will be for the selected beam(s) only.

Table 1 Concrete Column Design Output Technical Note 24 - 1

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN ACI318-99

Technical Note 24

Output Details

This Technical Note describes the concrete frame design output for ACI318-99

that can be printed to a printer or to a text file. The design output is printed

when you click the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design

command and select Output Summary on the Print Design Tables form. Fur-

ther information about using the Print Design Tables form is presented at the

end of this Technical Note.

The program provides the output data in a series of tables. The column

headings for output data and a description of what is included in the columns

of the tables are provided in Table 1 of this Technical Note.

Table 1 Concrete Column Design Output

COLUMN HEADING DESCRIPTION

Biaxial P-M Interaction and Shear Design of Column-Type Elements

Story ID Column assigned to story level at top of column.

Column Line Grid lines.

Section ID Name of section assigned to column.

Station ID

Required Reinforcing

Longitudinal Area of longitudinal reinforcing required.

Combo Load combination for which the reinforcing is designed.

Shear22 Shear reinforcing required.

Combo Load combination for which the reinforcing is designed.

Shear33 Shear reinforcing required.

Output Details Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99

Technical Note 24 - 2 Table 2 Concrete Column Joint Output

Table 1 Concrete Column Design Output

COLUMN HEADING DESCRIPTION

Combo Load combination for which the reinforcing is designed.

Table 2 Concrete Column Joint Output

COLUMN HEADING DESCRIPTION

Beam to Column Capacity Ratios and Joint Shear Capacity Check

Story ID Story level at which joint occurs.

Column Line Grid line.

Section ID Assigned section name.

Beam-Column Capacity Ratios

Major Ratio of beam moment capacity to column capacity.

Combo Load combination upon which the ratio of beam moment ca-

pacity to column capacity is based.

Minor Ratio of beam moment capacity to column capacity.

Combo Load combination upon which the ratio of beam moment ca-

pacity to column capacity is based.

Joint Shear Capacity Ratios

Major Ratio of factored load versus allowed capacity.

Combo Load combination upon which the ratio of factored load versus

allowed capacity is based.

Minor Ratio of factored load versus allowed capacity.

Combo Load combination upon which the ratio of factored load versus

allowed capacity is based.

Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 Output Details

Using the Print Design Tables Form Technical Note 24 - 3

Using the Print Design Tables Form

To print concrete frame design input data directly to a printer, use the File

menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design command and click the

check box on the Print Design Tables form. Click the OK button to send the

print to your printer. Click the Cancel button rather than the OK button to

cancel the print. Use the File menu > Print Setup command and the

Setup>> button to change printers, if necessary.

To print concrete frame design input data to a file, click the Print to File check

box on the Print Design Tables form. Click the Filename>> button to change

the path or filename. Use the appropriate file extension for the desired format

(e.g., .txt, .xls, .doc). Click the OK buttons on the Open File for Printing Ta-

bles form and the Print Design Tables form to complete the request.

Note:

The File menu > Display Input/Output Text Files command is useful for displaying out-

put that is printed to a text file.

The Append check box allows you to add data to an existing file. The path and

filename of the current file is displayed in the box near the bottom of the Print

Design Tables form. Data will be added to this file. Or use the Filename>>

button to locate another file, and when the Open File for Printing Tables cau-

tion box appears, click Yes to replace the existing file.

If you select a specific frame element(s) before using the File menu > Print

Tables > Concrete Frame Design command, the Selection Only check box

will be checked. The print will be for the selected beam(s) only.

ETABS

®

Integrated Building Design Software

Concrete Frame Design Manual

Computers and Structures, Inc. Berkeley, California, USA

Version 8 January 2002

Unlicensed use of the program or reproduction of the documentation in any form.com Copyright Computers and Structures. Further information and copies of this documentation may be obtained from: Computers and Structures..com (for technical support questions) web: www.Copyright The computer program ETABS and all associated documentation are proprietary and copyrighted products. Inc. ETABS is a trademark of Computers and Structures. Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated .csiberkeley. 1995 University Avenue Berkeley. is explicitly prohibited. Inc. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.com (for general questions) e-mail: support@csiberkeley. without prior written authorization from Computers and Structures. Inc. Inc. Inc. Worldwide rights of ownership rest with Computers and Structures. The CSI Logo is a trademark of Computers and Structures. California 94704 USA Phone: (510) 845-2177 FAX: (510) 845-4096 e-mail: info@csiberkeley. Inc. 1978-2002..

.

THE USER MUST THOROUGHLY READ THE MANUAL AND CLEARLY RECOGNIZE THE ASPECTS OF CONCRETE DESIGN THAT THE PROGRAM ALGORITHMS DO NOT ADDRESS. THE USER MUST EXPLICITLY UNDERSTAND THE ASSUMPTIONS OF THE PROGRAM AND MUST INDEPENDENTLY VERIFY THE RESULTS. THE PROGRAM HAS BEEN THOROUGHLY TESTED AND USED.DISCLAIMER CONSIDERABLE TIME. HOWEVER. IN USING THE PROGRAM. HOWEVER. THE USER ACCEPTS AND UNDERSTANDS THAT NO WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED BY THE DEVELOPERS OR THE DISTRIBUTORS ON THE ACCURACY OR THE RELIABILITY OF THE PROGRAM. EFFORT AND EXPENSE HAVE GONE INTO THE DEVELOPMENT AND DOCUMENTATION OF ETABS. THIS PROGRAM IS A VERY PRACTICAL TOOL FOR THE DESIGN/CHECK OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES. .

.

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES. CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN Contents General Concrete Frame Design Information 1 General Design Information Design Codes Units Overwriting the Frame Design Procedure for a Concrete Frame Design Load Combinations Design of Beams Design of Columns Beam/Column Flexural Capacity Ratios Second Order P-Delta Effects Element Unsupported Lengths Analysis Sections and Design Sections Concrete Frame Design Process Concrete Frame Design Procedure Interactive Concrete Frame Design General Concrete Design Information Form Output Data Plotted Directly on the Model Overview Using the Print Design Tables Form Design Input Design Output 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-2 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-4 1-6 1-7 2 2-1 3 3-1 3-1 4 4-1 4-1 4-2 4-2 i . BERKELEY. INC..

Concrete Frame Design Manual Concrete Frame Design Specific to UBC97 5 General and Notation Introduction to the UBC 97 Series of Technical Notes Notation Preferences General Using the Preferences Form Preferences Overwrites General Overwrites Making Changes in the Overwrites Form Resetting Concrete Frame Overwrites to Default Values Design Load Combinations Strength Reduction Factors Column Design Overview Generation of Biaxial Interaction Surfaces Calculate Column Capacity Ratio Determine Factored Moments and Forces Determine Moment Magnification Factors Determine Capacity Ratio Required Reinforcing Area Design Column Shear Reinforcement Determine Required Shear Reinforcement Reference Beam Design Overview Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement Determine Factored Moments Determine Required Flexural Reinforcement 5-1 5-2 6 6-1 6-1 6-2 7 7-1 7-1 7-3 7-4 8 9 10 10-1 10-2 10-5 10-6 10-6 10-8 10-10 10-10 10-14 10-15 11 11-1 11-1 11-2 11-2 ii .

Contents Design Beam Shear Reinforcement 12 Joint Design Overview Determine the Panel Zone Shear Force Determine the Effective Area of Joint Check Panel Zone Shear Stress Beam/Column Flexural Capacity Ratios Input Data Input data Using the Print Design Tables Form Output Details Using the Print Design Tables Form 11-10 12-1 12-1 12-5 12-5 12-6 13 13-1 13-3 14 14-3 Concrete Frame Design Specific to ACI-318-99 15 General and Notation Introduction to the ACI318-99 Series of Technical Notes Notation Preferences General Using the Preferences Form Preferences Overwrites General Overwrites Making Changes in the Overwrites Form Resetting Concrete Frame Overwrites to Default Values Design Load Combinations Strength Reduction Factors 15-1 15-2 16 16-1 16-1 16-2 17 17-1 17-1 17-3 17-4 18 19 iii .

Concrete Frame Design Manual 20 Column Design Overview Generation of Biaxial Interaction Surfaces Calculate Column Capacity Ratio Determine Factored Moments and Forces Determine Moment Magnification Factors Determine Capacity Ratio Required Reinforcing Area Design Column Shear Reinforcement Determine Section Forces Determine Concrete Shear Capacity Determine Required Shear Reinforcement References Beam Design Overview Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement Determine Factored Moments Determine Required Flexural Reinforcement Design for T-Beam Minimum Tensile Reinforcement Special Consideration for Seismic Design Design Beam Shear Reinforcement Determine Shear Force and Moment Determine Concrete Shear Capacity Determine Required Shear Reinforcement Joint Design Overview Determine the Panel Zone Shear Force Determine the Effective Area of Joint Check Panel Zone Shear Stress Beam/Column Flexural Capacity Ratios Input Data Input Data Using the Print Design Tables Form 20-1 20-2 20-5 20-6 20-6 20-9 20-10 20-10 20-11 20-12 20-13 20-15 21 21-1 21-1 21-2 21-2 21-5 21-8 21-8 21-9 21-11 21-12 21-13 22 22-1 22-1 22-4 22-4 22-6 23 23-1 23-3 iv .

Contents 24 Output Details Using the Print Design Tables Form 24-3 v .

.

Overwriting the Frame Design Procedure for a Concrete Frame The two design procedures possible for concrete beam design are: Concrete frame design No design If a line object is assigned a frame section property that has a concrete material property. its default design procedure is Concrete Frame Design.. BERKELEY. You can change the system of units at any time. You can choose to design for any one design code in any one design run. You can. You cannot design some elements for one code and others for a different code in the same design run.©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES. INC. CALIFORNIA JANUARY 2002 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN Technical Note 1 General Design Information This Technical Note presents some basic information and concepts helpful when performing concrete frame design using this program. Units For concrete frame design in this program. A concrete frame element can be switched between the Concrete Frame Design and the "None" design procedure. any set of consistent units can be used for input.1 . Design Codes The design code is set using the Options menu > Preferences > Concrete Frame Design command. design codes are based on one specific set of units. however. Design Codes Technical Note 1 . Typically. Assign a concrete frame element the "None" design procedure if you do not want it designed by the Concrete Frame Design postprocessor. perform different design runs using different design codes without rerunning the analysis.

Technical Note 1 . load combination factors.2 Design Load Combinations . For more information see Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 8 Design Load Combination and Concrete Frame Design ACI 318-99 Technical Note 18 Design Load Combination. In the design of concrete beams. which are described in detail in Concrete Frame UBC97 Technical Note Beam Design 11 and Concrete Frame ACI 318-99 Technical Note 21 Beam Design. minor direction bending. For example. Effects resulting from any axial forces. if you select a concrete element and attempt to change the design procedure to Steel Frame Design. All the beams are designed for major direction flexure and shear only.General Design Information Concrete Frame Design Change the default design procedure used for concrete frame elements by selecting the element(s) and clicking Design menu > Overwrite Frame Design Procedure. the steps involve the determination of the maximum factored moments and the determination of the reinforcing steel. the program calculates and reports the required areas of steel for flexure and shear based on the beam moments. You can also modify or delete the program default load combinations. and torsion that may exist in the beams must be investigated independently by the user. To define a design load combination. in general. each with its own scale factor. An unlimited number of design load combinations can be specified. The reinforcement requirements are calculated at each output station along the beam span. You can add in your own design load combinations. shears. the program will not allow the change because a concrete element cannot be changed to a steel frame element. Design of Beams The program designs all concrete frame elements designated as beam sections in their Frame Section Properties as beams (see Define menu >Frame Sections command and click the Reinforcement button). This change is only successful if the design procedure assigned to an element is valid for that element. simply specify one or more load cases. and other criteria. In designing the flexural reinforcement for the major moment at a particular section of a particular beam. Design Load Combinations The program creates a number of default design load combinations for concrete frame design.

The design procedure for reinforced concrete columns involves the following steps: Generate axial force-biaxial moment interaction surfaces for all of the different concrete section types of the model. the beam is always designed as a rectangular section. the program calculates the required longitudinal steel. the beam is first designed as a singly reinforced beam.3 . the determination of the shear force that can be resisted by concrete.Concrete Frame Design General Design Information The beam section is designed for the maximum positive and maximum negative factored moment envelopes obtained from all of the load combinations. Check the capacity of each column for the factored axial force and bending moments obtained from each load combination at each end of the column. If the beam section is not adequate. In the design of the columns. or if the longitudinal steel is specified. In designing the shear reinforcement for a particular beam for a particular set of loading combinations at a particular station resulting from the beam major shear. Design of Columns The program designs all concrete frame elements designated as column sections in their Frame Section Properties as columns (see Define menu >Frame Sections command and click the Reinforcement button). the steps involve the determination of the factored shear force. Positive beam moments produce bottom steel. Negative beam moments produce top steel. the beam may be designed as a rectangular.or T-beam. See Concrete Frame UBC97 Technical Note 10 Design of Beams Technical Note 1 . and the determination of the reinforcement steel required to carry the balance. the required compression reinforcement is calculated. In such cases.0. Design the column shear reinforcement. The shear reinforcement design procedure for columns is very similar to that for beams. This step is also used to calculate the required reinforcement (if none was specified) that will produce a capacity ratio of 1. except that the effect of the axial force on the concrete shear capacity needs to be considered. For the design of flexural reinforcement. The capacity ratio is a factor that gives an indication of the stress condition of the column with respect to the capacity of the column. In such cases. the column stress condition is reported in terms of a column capacity ratio.

The maximum capacity summations obtained from all of the load combinations is used for the beam/column capacity ratio. For each load combination. design codes require that second order P-Delta effects be considered when designing concrete frames. The beam capacities are calculated for reversed situations and the maximum summation obtained is used. and including ϕ factors. For each load combination. α. See Beam/Column Flexural Capacity Ratios in Concrete Frame UBC97 Technical Note 12 Joint Design or in Concrete Frame ACI 318-99 Technical Note 22 Joint Design for more information. Pu. the axial force. They are the global lateral translation of the frame and the local deformation of elements within the frame. the moment capacity of each column under the influence of the corresponding axial load Pu is then determined separately for the major and minor directions of the column. The capacities are calculated with no reinforcing overstrength factor.General Design Information Concrete Frame Design Column Design and Concrete Frame ACI 318-99 Technical Note 20 Column Design for more information. in each of the columns is calculated from the program analysis load combinations. The beam/column flexural capacity ratios are only reported for Special Moment-Resisting Frames involving seismic design load combinations. using the uniaxial column interaction diagram. major or minor. the program calculates the ratio of the sum of the beam moment capacities to the sum of the column moment capacities at a particular joint for a particular column direction. The P-Delta effects come from two sources. The moment capacities of beams that frame into the joint in a direction that is not parallel to the major or minor direction of the column are resolved along the direction that is being investigated and the resolved components are added to the summation. Technical Note 1 . Beam/Column Flexural Capacity Ratios When the ACI 318-99 or UBC97 code is selected. The column capacity summation includes the column above and the column below the joint.4 Second Order P-Delta Effects . Second Order P-Delta Effects Typically. The moment capacities of the two columns are added to give the capacity summation for the corresponding load combination.

The overall global translation of this frame element is indicated by ∆. but it does not typically capture the effect of the δ deformation (unless. ∆. which is extracted from a story level of a larger structure. The program has an option to consider P-Delta effects in the analysis. shown by dashed line δ Final deflected position of frame element that includes the global lateral translation. ∆.5 . 1. The total second order P-Delta effects on this frame element are those caused by both ∆ and δ. MCAP = Flexural design capacity = aMnt + bMlt Eqn. MCAP where. δ Figure 1: The Total Second Order P-Delta Effects on a Frame Element Caused by Both ∆ and δ Consider the frame element shown in Figure 1. The local deformation of the element is shown as δ.Concrete Frame Design General Design Information ∆ Original position of frame element shown by vertical line Position of frame element as a result of global lateral translation. In design codes. the frame element is broken into multiple pieces over its length). and the local deformation of the element. Controls for considering this effect are found using the Analyze menu > Set Analysis Options command and then clicking the Set P-Delta Parameters button. 1 Second Order P-Delta Effects Technical Note 1 . consideration of the second order P-Delta effects is generally achieved by computing the flexural design capacity using a formula similar to that shown in Equation. the program does a good job of capturing the effect due to the ∆ deformation shown in Figure 1. in the model. When you consider P-Delta effects in the analysis.

in general.. see below) Mlt = a b = = When the program performs concrete frame design. Technical Note 1 . That b = 1 assumes that you have considered P-Delta effects in the analysis. Thus. using the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > View/Revise Overwrites command. The length L22 is also used for lateral-torsional buckling caused by major direction bending (i. as shown in Figure 2.e. associated with the δ deformation in Figure 1) Required flexural capacity of the member as a result of lateral translation of the frame only (i. diaphragm constraints and support points. you should consider P-Delta effects in the analysis before running the design.e.General Design Information Concrete Frame Design Mnt = Required flexural capacity of the member assuming there is no translation of the frame (i. They are L33 and L22. In determining the values for L22 and L33 of the elements. about the 3-3 axis)..6 Element Unsupported Lengths . it assumes that the factor b is equal to 1 and it uses code-specific formulas to calculate the factor a. The program automatically determines these unsupported lengths. if you are performing concrete frame design in this program. These are the lengths between support points of the element in the corresponding directions. as previously described. They can also be overwritten by the user on an element-by-element basis.e. associated with the ∆ deformation in Figure 1) Unitless factor multiplying Mnt Unitless factor multiplying Mlt (assumed equal to 1 by the program. if desired. the program recognizes various aspects of the structure that have an effect on these lengths. and L22 corresponds to instability about the 2-2 axis (minor axis). such as member connectivity. The length L33 corresponds to instability about the 3-3 axis (major axis). Element Unsupported Lengths The column unsupported lengths are required to account for column slenderness effects. The program automatically locates the element support points and evaluates the corresponding unsupported length.. There are two unsupported lengths to consider.

Concrete Frame Design General Design Information Figure 2: Major and Minor Axes of Bending It is possible for the unsupported length of a frame element to be evaluated by the program as greater than the corresponding element length. In this case. The design section is whatever section has most currently been designed and thus designated the current design section.7 . assume a column has a beam framing into it in one direction. Tip: It is important to understand the difference between analysis sections and design sections. and its unsupported length in the other direction will exceed the story height. the column is assumed to be supported in one direction only at that story level. at a floor level. Analysis Sections and Design Sections Technical Note 1 . Analysis Sections and Design Sections Analysis sections are those section properties used to analyze the model when you click the Analyze menu > Run Analysis command. For example. but not the other.

but it does not delete or change the design section. but it does not delete or change the design section. Running an analysis using the Analyze menu > Run Analysis command (or its associated toolbar button) always sets the analysis section to be the same as the current design section. Unlocking a model deletes the design results. Technical Note 1 . The program keeps track of the analysis section and the design section separately.General Design Information Concrete Frame Design It is possible for the last used analysis section and the current design section to be different. Using the Define menu > Load Combinations command to change a design load combination deletes the design results. Assigning an auto select list to a frame section using the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Frame Section command initially sets the design section to be the beam with the median weight in the auto select list. Using the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Select Design Combo command to change a design load combination deletes the design results. Using the Options menu > Preferences > Concrete Frame Design command to change any of the composite beam design preferences deletes the design results. In that case. the last used analysis section is the W18X35 and the current design section is the W16X31. you may have run your analysis using a W18X35 beam and then found in the design that a W16X31 beam worked. Note the following about analysis and design sections: Assigning a beam a frame section property using the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Frame Section command assigns the section as both the analysis section and the design section. Before you complete the design process. Typically. but it does not delete or change the design section. For example. verify that the last used analysis section and the current design section are the same. The Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Verify Analysis vs Design Section command is useful for this task.8 Analysis Sections and Design Sections . but it does not delete or change the design section. Deleting the static nonlinear analysis results also deletes the design results for any load combination that includes static nonlinear forces.

Use the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Frame Nonlinear Hinges command to add or delete hinges.Concrete Frame Design General Design Information static nonlinear analysis and design results are deleted when one of the following actions is taken: Use the Define menu > Frame Nonlinear Hinge Properties command to redefine existing or define new hinges. Analysis Sections and Design Sections Technical Note 1 . Again. note that these actions delete only results for load combinations that include static nonlinear forces.9 . Use the Define menu > Static Nonlinear/Pushover Cases command to redefine existing or define new static nonlinear load cases.

.

Concrete Frame Design Procedure The following sequence describes a typical concrete frame design process for a new building. including the distinction between analysis sections and design sections (see Analysis Sections and Design Sections in Concrete Frame Design Technical Note 1 General Design Information). 1. Note that when using this command. The concrete frame design postprocessor can design or check concrete columns and can design concrete beams. BERKELEY. See Concrete Frame Design ACI UBC97 Technical Notes 6 Preferences and Concrete Frame Design ACI 318-99 Technical Notes 16 Preferences for more information. the basic design process should be similar to that described herein. Note that default values are provided for all concrete frame design preferences. Important note: A concrete frame element is designed as a beam or a column.. after you have specified that a section has a concrete material property. Note that although the sequence of steps you follow may vary. the basic process probably will be essentially the same. INC.1 . depending on how its frame section property was designated when it was defined using the Define menu > Frame Sections command. Other Technical Notes in the Concrete Frame Design series provide additional information.©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES. you can click on the Reinforcement button and specify whether it is a beam or a column. CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN Technical Note 2 Concrete Frame Design Process This Technical Note describes a basic concrete frame design process using this program. Use the Options menu > Preferences > Concrete Frame Design command to choose the concrete frame design code and to review other concrete frame design preferences and revise them if necessary. so it is unnecessary to define any preferences unless you want to change some of the default values. Although the exact steps you follow may vary. Concrete Frame Design Procedure Technical Note 2 .

7. See Concrete Frame Design Technical Note 4 Output Data Plotted Directly on the Model for more information. b. 4. See Concrete Frame Design Technical Note 3 Interactive Concrete Frame Design for more information. Right click on a frame element while the design results are displayed on it to enter the interactive design mode and interactively design the frame element. you can revise overwrites and immediately see the results of the new design. click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Select Design Combo command. if needed. Create the building model. Technical Note 2 . 5. 3. Note that you must select frame elements before using this command. See Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 8 Design Load Combinations and Concrete Frame Design ACI 318-99 Technical Note 18 Design Load Combinations for more information. Note that while you are in this mode. Also note that default values are provided for all concrete frame design overwrites. To use any design load combinations other than the defaults created by the program for your concrete frame design. See Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 7 Overwrites and Concrete Frame Design ACI 318-99 Technical Note 17 Overwrites for more information.2 Concrete Frame Design Procedure .Concrete Frame Design Process Concrete Frame Design 2. so it is unnecessary to define any overwrites unless you want to change some of the default values. 6. Assign concrete frame overwrites. Click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Start Design/Check of Structure command to run the concrete frame design. Click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Display Design Info command to display design input and output information on the model. Run the building analysis using the Analyze menu > Run Analysis command. using the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > View/Revise Overwrites command. Note that you must have already created your own design combos by clicking the Define menu > Load Combinations command. Review the concrete frame design results by doing one of the following: a. Note that the overwrites can be assigned before or after the analysis is run.

Concrete Frame Design Concrete Frame Design Process If design results are not currently displayed (and the design has been run). if necessary. data is printed only for the selected elements. Review the results using the procedures described above. click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Interactive Concrete Frame Design command and then right click a frame element to enter the interactive design mode for that element. Click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Start Design/Check of Structure command to rerun the concrete frame design with the new analysis results and new section properties. 12. 14. See Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 14 Output Details and Concrete Frame Design ACI 318-99 Technical Note 24 Output Details for more information. Note that the section properties used for the analysis are the last specified design section properties. 9. Again use the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Change Design Section command to change the design section properties for selected frame elements.3 . 8. 11 and 12 as many times as necessary. Use the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design command to print concrete frame design data. Concrete Frame Design Procedure Technical Note 2 . Repeat the processes in steps 10. Review the results using the procedures described in Item 7. 11. 10. Rerun the building analysis using the Analyze menu > Run Analysis command. If you select frame elements before using this command. 13. Use the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Change Design Section command to change the design section properties for selected frame elements. Note that the section properties used for the analysis are the last specified design section properties. Click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Start Design/Check of Structure command to rerun the concrete frame design with the new section properties. 15. Rerun the building analysis using the Analyze menu > Run Analysis command.

18. Use the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design command to print selected concrete frame design results. 17. 16. Typically. Click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Start Design/Check of Structure command to rerun the concrete frame design with the new section properties.4 Concrete Frame Design Procedure . if desired. The sections used in the original analysis are not typically the same as those obtained at the end of the design process. Review the results using the procedures described in Item 7. Use the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Verify Analysis vs Design Section command to verify that the design sections are the same as the analysis sections.Concrete Frame Design Process Concrete Frame Design Note: Concrete frame design is an iterative process. Click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Verify Analysis vs Design Section command to verify that all of the final design sections are the same as the last used analysis sections. Always run the building analysis using the final frame section sizes and then run a design check using the forces obtained from that analysis. Technical Note 2 . the analysis and design will be rerun multiple times to complete a design. It is important to note that design is an iterative process.

General Note that a design must have been run for the interactive design mode to be available. which is a powerful mode that allows the user to review the design results for any concrete frame design and interactively revise the design assumptions and immediately review the revised results. INC. CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN Technical Note 3 Interactive Concrete Frame Design This Technical Note describes interactive concrete frame design and review. If design results are not currently displayed (and a design has been run). General Technical Note 3 . click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Interactive Concrete Frame Design command and then right click a frame element to enter the interactive design mode for that element. click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Start Design/Check of Structure command. Concrete Design Information Form Table 1 describe the features that are included in the Concrete Design Information form. Right click on a frame element while the design results are displayed on it to enter the interactive design mode and interactively design the element in the Concrete Design Information form. Important note: A concrete frame element is designed as a beam or a column. BERKELEY.1 . depending on how its frame section property was designated when it was defined using the Define menu > Frame Sections command and the Reinforcement button. To run a design.©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES.. which is only available if it is a concrete section.

Column Section Name Reinforcement Information The reinforcement information table on the Concrete Design Information form shows the output information obtained for each design load combination at each output station along the frame element. This is the location of the station considered. This item is the capacity ratio. the item with the largest capacity ratio is initially highlighted. This item applies to columns only. For columns that are designed by this program.2 Table 1 Concrete Design Information Form . For columns that are checked by this program. measured from the i-end of the frame element. the item with the largest required amount of bottom steel is initially highlighted. the item with the largest required amount of longitudinal reinforcing is initially highlighted. This item applies to columns only. Technical Note 3 . It also only applies to columns for which the program designs the longitudinal reinforcing.Interactive Concrete Frame Design Concrete Frame Design Table 1 Concrete Design Information Form Item Story Beam DESCRIPTION This is the story level ID associated with the frame element. This is the label associated with a frame element that has been assigned a concrete frame section property that is designated as a beam. For beams. It is the total required area of longitudinal reinforcing steel. It also only applies to columns for which you have specified the location and size of reinforcing bars and thus the program checks the design. Following are the possible headings in the table: Combo ID Station location Longitudinal reinforcement Capacity ratio This is the name of the design load combination considered. See the important note previously in this Technical Note for more information. See the important note previously in this Technical Note for more information. This is the label associated with a frame element that has been assigned a concrete frame section property. This is the label associated with a frame element that has been assigned a concrete frame section property that is designated as a column.

It is the total required area of shear reinforcing per unit length at the specified station for loads acting in the local 2-axis direction of the beam. Overwrites Button Table 1 Concrete Design Information Form Technical Note 3 . This item applies to beams only. M2 and M3 values for the designated load combination. Next. This item applies to beams only. If you then exit the Concrete Design Information form by clicking the Cancel button the changes you made to the concrete frame overwrites are considered temporary only and are not permanently saved. This item applies to columns only. Assume the length of this first line is designated L1. When you exit the Concrete Frame Design Overwrites form by clicking the OK button the changes are temporarily saved.3 .Concrete Frame Design Interactive Concrete Frame Design Table 1 Concrete Design Information Form Item DESCRIPTION The capacity ratio is determined by first extending a line from the origin of the PMM interaction surface to the point representing the P. the changes to the overwrites are saved permanently. It is the total required area of shear reinforcing per unit length for shear acting in the column minor direction. Major shear reinforcement Minor shear reinforcement Top steel Bottom steel Shear steel This item applies to columns only. It is the total required area of longitudinal top steel at the specified station. Assume the length of this line from the origin to the interaction surface is designated L2. This item applies to beams only. Permanent saving of the overwrites does not actually occur until you click the OK button in the Concrete Design Information form as well as the Concrete Frame Design Overwrites form. It is the total required area of longitudinal bottom steel at the specified station. It is the total required area of shear reinforcing per unit length for shear acting in the column major direction. If you modify some overwrites in this mode and you exit both the Concrete Frame Design Overwrites form and the Concrete Design Information form by clicking their respective OK buttons. M2 and M3 values for the designated load combination until it intersects the interaction surface. The capacity ratio is equal to L1/L2. a second line is extended from the origin of the PMM interaction surface through the point representing the P. Click this button to access and make revisions to the concrete frame overwrites and then immediately see the new design results.

Clicking this button displays the biaxial interaction curve for the concrete section at the location in the element that is highlighted in the table.4 Table 1 Concrete Design Information Form . Interaction Button Technical Note 3 . Print this information by selecting Print from the File menu that appears at the top of the window displaying the design details.Interactive Concrete Frame Design Concrete Frame Design Table 1 Concrete Design Information Form Item Details Button DESCRIPTION Clicking this button displays design details for the frame element.

The path and filename of the current file is displayed in the box near the bottom of the Print Design Tables form.doc). Click the OK buttons on the Open File for Printing Tables form and the Print Design Tables form to complete the request. Overview Use the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Display Design Info command to display on-screen output plotted directly on the program model. Click the Cancel button rather than the OK button to cancel the print. Use the appropriate file extension for the desired format (e. BERKELEY. . if necessary. Or use the Filename Overview Technical Note 4 .g. The on-screen display data presents input and output data. Click the OK button to send the print to your printer.txt. the screen graphics can then be printed using the File menu > Print Graphics command. Click the Filename>> button to change the path or filename.xls. use the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design command and click the check box on the Print Design Tables form. INC.1 . Note: The File menu > Display Input/Output Text Files command is useful for displaying output that is printed to a text file. Use the File menu > Print Setup command and the Setup>> button to change printers.. Data will be added to this file. . CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN Technical Note 4 Output Data Plotted Directly on the Model This Technical Note describes the input and output data that can be plotted directly on the model.©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES. click the Print to File check box on the Print Design Tables form. To print the concrete frame input summary to a file. . Using the Print Design Tables Form To print the concrete frame input summary directly to a printer.. If desired. The Append check box allows you to add data to an existing file.

Display this form by selecting he Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Display Design Info command. Design Input The following types of data can be displayed directly on the model by selecting the data type (shown in bold type) from the drop-down list on the Display Design Results form. The print will be for the selected steel frame element(s) only. Display this form by selecting he Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Display Design Info command. and when the Open File for Printing Tables caution box appears. Technical Note 4 . Design Sections Design Type Live Load Red Factors Unbraced L_Ratios Eff Length K-Factors Cm Factors DNS Factors DS Factors Each of these items is described in the code-specific Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 13 Input Data and Concrete Frame Design ACI 318-99 Technical Note 23 Input Data. If you select a specific concrete frame element(s) before using the File menu > Print Tables > concrete Frame Design command. the Selection Only check box will be checked. click Yes to replace the existing file.Output Data Plotted Directly on the Model Concrete Frame Design button to locate another file. Design Output The following types of data can be displayed directly on the model by selecting the data type (shown in bold type) from the drop-down list on the Display Design Results form.2 Design Input .

Design Output Technical Note 4 .Concrete Frame Design Output Data Plotted Directly on the Model Longitudinal Reinforcing Shear Reinforcing Column Capacity Ratios Joint Shear Capacity Ratios Beam/Column Capacity Ratios Each of these items is described in the code-specific Concrete Frame Design ACI 318-99 Technical Note 24 Output Details and Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 14 Output Details.3 .

.

The various notations used in this series are listed herein. BERKELEY. The program provides a set of default load combinations that should satisfy requirements for the design of most building type structures.. See Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 6 Preferences for more information. 1921): Ordinary Moment-Resisting Frame (OMF) General and Notation Technical Note 5 . However.©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES. When using the UBC 97 option.1 . INC. the Seismic Zone can be overwritten in the Preference form to change the default. When using the UBC 97 option. a frame is assigned to one of the following five Seismic Zones (UBC 2213. 2214): Zone 0 Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 By default the Seismic Zone is taken as Zone 4 in the program. CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN UBC97 Technical Note 5 General and Notation Introduction to the UBC97 Series of Technical Notes The Concrete Frame Design UBC97 series of Technical Notes describes in detail the various aspects of the concrete design procedure that is used by this program when the user selects the UBC97 Design Code (ICBO 1997). the following Framing Systems are recognized and designed according to the UBC design provisions (UBC 1627. See Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 8 Design Load Combinations for more information. The design is based on user-specified loading combinations.

and Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 12 Joint Design. and as SMRF in Seismic Zone 3 and 4. For simplicity. English as well as SI and MKS metric units can be used for input. See Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 7 Overwrites for more information. sq-in Gross area of concrete. The Intermediate Moment-Resisting Frame (IMRF) is appropriate in moderate seismic risk areas.2 General and Notation . sq-in Area of tension reinforcement. However. the frame type can be overwritten in the Overwrites form on a member-by-member basis. The code is based on Inch-Pound-Second units. as IMRF in Seismic Zone 2. Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 10 Column Design.General and Notation Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Intermediate Moment-Resisting Frame (IMRF) Special Moment-Resisting Frame (SMRF) The Ordinary Moment-Resisting Frame (OMF) is appropriate in minimal seismic risk areas. By default the frame type is taken in the program as OMRF in Seismic Zone 0 and 1. the change of the Seismic Zone in the Preferences will not modify the frame type of an individual member that has been assigned a frame type. The UBC seismic design provisions are considered in the program. all equations and descriptions presented in this Technical Note correspond to Inch-Pound-Second units unless otherwise noted. If any member is assigned with a frame type. The details of the design criteria used for the different framing systems are described in Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 9 Strength Reduction Factors. specially in Seismic Zone 2. sq-in Technical Note 5 . Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 11 Beam Design. specially in Seismic Zones 3 and 4. especially in Seismic Zones 0 and 1. which are described in Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 13 Input Data and Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 14 Output Details. Notation Acv Ag As Area of concrete used to determine shear stress. The program also provides input and output data summaries. The Special Moment-Resisting Frame (SMRF) is appropriate in high seismic risk areas.

2) Moment of inertia of gross concrete section about centroidal axis.3 .000 psi (UBC 1980. sq-in Total area of column longitudinal reinforcement. lb-in Larger factored end moment in a column. in Modulus of elasticity of concrete. lb-in Nonsway component of factored end moment. lb-in Sway component of factored end moment. lb-in Factored moment at section about X-axis. psi Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement. lb-in Factored moment at section about Y-axis.000. used to calculate moment magnification factor Diameter of hoop. sq-in Area of steel required for tension reinforcement. assumed as 29. in4 Clear unsupported length. in Smaller factored end moment in a column. sq-in Coefficient. lb-in Axial load capacity at balanced strain conditions. sq-in Area of shear reinforcement. lb-in Factored moment at section. dependent upon column curvature. neglecting reinforcement. lb-in Factored moment to be used in design.5. lb As(required) Ast Av Cm D' Ec Es Ig Ise L M1 M2 Mc Mns Ms Mu Mux Muy Pb General and Notation Technical Note 5 .Concrete Frame Design UBC97 General and Notation ' As Area of compression reinforcement. in4 Moment of inertia of reinforcement about centroidal axis of member cross section.

psi Specified yield strength of flexural reinforcement. lb Factored axial load at section. lb Shear force caused by earthquake loads. in Thickness of slab (T-Beam section). in Effective width of flange (T-Beam section). in Depth to neutral axis. lb Factored shear force at a section.000 psi (UBC 1909. in Depth to neutral axis at balanced conditions. in Concrete cover to center of reinforcing. lb Acial load capacity at zero eccentricity. lb Depth of compression block. in Width of member. lb Shear resisted by concrete. lb Shear force from span loading.4 General and Notation .General and Notation Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Pc Pmax P0 Pu Vc VE VD+L Vu Vp a ab b bf bw c cb d d' ds f c' fy Critical buckling strength of column. psi fy ≤ 80. in Depth of compression block at balanced condition. in Specified compressive strength of concrete. lb Shear force computed from probable moment capacity. in Distance from compression face to tension reinforcement. in Width of web (T-Beam section).4) Technical Note 5 . lb Maximum axial load strength allowed.

in Reinforcing steel overstrength factor Factor for obtaining depth of compression block in concrete Absolute value of ratio of maximum factored axial dead load to maximum factored axial total load Moment magnification factor for sway moments Moment magnification factor for nonsway moments Strain in concrete Strain in reinforcing steel Strength reduction factor α β1 βd δs δns εc εs ϕ General and Notation Technical Note 5 .Concrete Frame Design UBC97 General and Notation fys h k r Specified yield strength of flexural reinforcement.5 . psi Dimension of column. in Effective length factor Radius of gyration of column section.

.

Default values are provided for all concrete frame design preference items. You cannot overwrite values in the dropdown boxes. CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN UBC97 Technical Note 6 Preferences This Technical Note describes the items in the Preferences form. The preference options are displayed in a two-column spreadsheet. If the cell is highlighted. select the Options menu > Preferences > Concrete Frame Design. BERKELEY. You must click the OK button for the changes to be accepted by the program. You should. When you have finished making changes to the concrete frame preferences.©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES. General The concrete frame design preferences in this program are basic assignments that apply to all concrete frame elements. To change a preference item. This activates a drop-down box or highlights the current preference value. it is not required that you specify or change any of the preferences. left click the desired preference item in either the left or right column of the spreadsheet. type in the desired value. The preference value will update accordingly. The right column of the spreadsheet displays the preference item value.. INC. The left column of the spreadsheet displays the preference item name. however. If you click the Cancel button to exit General Technical Note 6 . at least review the default values for the preference items to make sure they are acceptable to you. select a new value. Use the Options menu > Preferences > Concrete Frame Design command to access the Preferences form where you can view and revise the concrete frame design preferences. click the OK button to close the form. Using the Preferences Form To view preferences.1 . If the drop-down box appears. The Preferences form will display. Thus.

Possible Values: The possible values that the associated preference item can have. The column headings in the table are described as follows: Item: The name of the preference item as it appears in the cells at the left side of the Preferences form. Default Value: The built-in default value that the program assumes for the associated preference item.Preferences Concrete Frame Design UBC97 the form.9 0. Unitless strength reduction factor per UBC 1909. Description: A description of the associated preference item. Phi Bending Tension Phi Compression Tied Phi Compression Spiral Phi Shear Number Interaction Curves 0. Unitless strength reduction factor per UBC 1909.7 0. Unitless strength reduction factor per UBC 1909. the preference items are presented in Table 1. We recommend that you use 24 for this item. any changes made to the preferences are ignored and the form is closed.85 24 Technical Note 6 . Number of equally spaced interaction curves used to create a full 360-degree interaction surface (this item should be a multiple of four). Unitless strength reduction factor per UBC 1909.2 Preferences .0 Default Value UBC97 Description Design code used for design of concrete frame elements. Preferences For purposes of explanation in this Technical Note.75 0. Table 1: Concrete Frame Preferences Item Design Code Possible Values Any code in the program >0 >0 >0 >0 ≥4.

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Preferences Table 1: Concrete Frame Preferences Item Possible Values Default Value 11 Description Number of points used for defining a single curve in a concrete frame interaction surface (this item should be odd).3 .0 Time History Design Envelopes or Step-by-Step Envelopes Preferences Technical Note 6 . regardless of what is specified here. Toggle for design load combinations that include a time history designed for the envelope of the time history.Any odd value action Points ≥1. that design load combination is designed for the envelopes of the time histories. Number Inter. If a single design load combination has more than one time history case in it. or designed step-by-step for the entire time history.

.

Item: The name of the overwrite item as it appears in the program. This Technical Note describes concrete frame design overwrites for UBC97. Overwrites Technical Note 7 . the program applies the changes only to the elements to which they are specifically assigned. at least review the default values for the overwrite items to make sure they are acceptable. Thus. To access the overwrites. Default values are provided for all overwrite items.. INC. to the elements that are selected when the overwrites are changed. you do not need to specify or change any of the overwrites. these names are generally short. select an element and click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > View/Revise Overwrites command. When changes are made to overwrite items. An explanation of how to change an overwrite is provided at the end of this Technical Note. Default Value: The default value that the program assumes for the associated overwrite item. To save space in the formes.1 . Overwrites For explanation purposes in this Technical Note. BERKELEY. However. Description: A description of the associated overwrite item. the overwrites are presented in Table 1. CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN UBC97 Technical Note 7 Overwrites General The concrete frame design overwrites are basic assignments that apply only to those elements to which they are assigned.©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES. The column headings in the table are described as follows. Possible Values: The possible values that the associated overwrite item can have. that is.

Overwrites Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Overwrites Item Element Section Sway Special. 1 See UBC 1910.2 Overwrites . 1.0 >0 ≤1. 1.0 1.3.0 1 1 1 See UBC 1910.0 >0 ≤1.0 >0 ≤1. Sway Intermediate.11 to 1910.0 >0 ≤1.1.0 >0 ≤1.1 relates actual moment diagram to an equivalent uniform moment diagram. See UBC 1910.12. Possible Values Default Value Description Element Type Live Load Reduction Factor Horizontal Earthquake Factor Unbraced Length Ratio (Major) Unbraced Length Ratio (Minor) Effective Length Factor (K Major) Effective Length Factor (K Minor) Moment Coefficient (Cm Major) Moment Coefficient (Cm Minor) NonSway Moment Factor (Dns Major) Technical Note 7 . Used to reduce the live load contribution to the factored loading.3.1.12.12.0 >0 ≤1. 1 See UBC 1910. see UBC 1910.1 relates actual moment diagram to an equivalent uniform moment diagram. Sway Special Frame type.13.0 >0 ≤1.12.0 >0 ≤1. Sway Ordinary NonSway >0 ≤1.0 1.12. See UBC 1910.

1 See UBC 1910. The left column of the spreadsheet contains the name of the overwrite item. The names of the overwrite items are displayed in the first column of the spreadsheet. select an element and click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > View/Revise Overwrites command. Initially. The values of the overwrite items are visible in the second column of the spreadsheet if only one element was selected before the overwrites form was accessed. The right column of the spreadsheet contains the overwrites values.12. the check boxes in the Concrete Frame Design Overwrites form are all unchecked and all of the cells in the spreadsheet have a gray background to indicate that they are inactive and the items in the cells cannot be changed. Then left click in either column of the spreadsheet to activate a drop-down box or highlight the contents in the cell in the right column of the spreadsheet.3 .12. If the drop-down box appears. After selecting one or multiple elements. The overwrites are displayed in the form with a column of check boxes and a two-column spreadsheet.Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Overwrites Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Overwrites Item NonSway Moment Factor (Dns Minor) Sway Moment Factor (Ds Major) Sway Moment Factor (Ds Minor) Possible Values Default Value 1 Description See UBC 1910. check the box to the left of an overwrite item to change it. select a value from Overwrites Technical Note 7 . no values show for the overwrite items in the second column of the spreadsheet. If multiple elements were selected.12. 1 See UBC 1910. Making Changes in the Overwrites Form To access the concrete frame overwrites.

If you click the Cancel button to exit the form. The overwrite will reflect the change. Technical Note 7 . The concrete frame overwrite values that were in a . If the cell contents is highlighted. When you reset overwrites. not to the values that were in the . the program resets the overwrite values to its built-in values. The program then changes all of the overwrite items whose associated check boxes are checked for the selected members.edb file used to initialize the model. Resetting Concrete Frame Overwrites to Default Values Use the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Reset All Overwrites command to reset all of the steel frame overwrites. All current design results will be deleted when this command is executed. When changes to the overwrites have been completed. You must click the OK button for the changes to be accepted by the program. You cannot change the values of the dropdown boxes.Overwrites Concrete Frame Design UBC97 the box. click the OK button to close the form. any changes made to the overwrites are ignored and the form is closed. Important note about resetting overwrites: The program defaults for the overwrite items are built into the program.4 Overwrites . type in the desired value.edb file that you used to initialize your model may be different from the built-in program default values.

1). if a structure is subjected to dead load (DL) and live load (LL) only.1) These are also the default design load combinations in the program whenever the UBC97 code is used.0 EL 1.. However. 1. Design Load Combinations Technical Note 8 .4 DL + 1. See Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 7 Overwrites for more information. and considering that wind and earthquake forces are reversible.1) (UBC 1909.9 DL ± 1.3 WL 0.2). 1612. namely 1. For the UBC 97 code.2. BERKELEY.2) (UBC 1909.2.2.1) (UBC 1909. 1612.2 DL + 0. the stress check may need only one load combination.1 .2.2.1) (UBC 1909.7 LL ± 1. the following load combinations may need to be considered (UBC 1909.5 LL ± 1.0 EL) (UBC 1909.2.2.9 DL ± 1. CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN UBC97 Technical Note 8 Design Load Combinations The design load combinations are the various combinations of the prescribed load cases for which the structure needs to be checked.7 WL) 0.3. Live load reduction factors can be applied to the member forces of the live load condition on an element-by-element basis to reduce the contribution of the live load to the factored loading.4 DL + 1. INC.4 DL 1.4 DL + 1.©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES.75 (1. in addition to the dead and live loads. if the structure is subjected to wind (WL) and earthquake (EL) loads.7 LL (UBC 1909.7 LL 0.2.2.3.2) (UBC 1909.

.

INC.3) (UBC 1909.2. and axial compression and flexure (tied column) (UBC 1909.75 for axial compression.2) = 0. ϕ..60 for shear and torsion (UBC 1909.3.85 for shear and torsion (non-seismic design) = 0.2.©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES.2) = 0.2) = 0. BERKELEY. CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN UBC97 Technical Note 9 Strength Reduction Factors The strength reduction factors.3. axial force.2.70 for axial compression. are applied on the nominal strength to obtain the design strength provided by a member. and axial compression and flexure (spirally reinforced column) (UBC 1909.3.1 . and torsion are as follows: ϕ ϕ ϕ ϕ = 0.2) (UBC 1909.3.2.90 for flexure = 0.3) ϕ ϕ ϕ Strength Reduction Factors Technical Note 9 . The ϕ factors for flexure.90 for axial tension = 0.2.1) (UBC 1909.90 for axial tension and flexure (UBC 1909.3.2. shear.2.3.3.

.

When the steel is undefined.1 . Design the column shear reinforcement. INC.4. A typical biaxial interaction surface is shown in Figure 1. the program will check the column capacity. BERKELEY.. Alternatively. If you define the geometry of the reinforcing bar configuration of each concrete column section.1) and 1 to 6 percent for Special moment resisting frames (UBC 1921. The following four subsections describe in detail the algorithms associated with this process.3. The design procedure for the reinforced concrete columns of the structure involves the following steps: Generate axial force/biaxial moment interaction surfaces for all of the different concrete section types of the model. the program generates the interaction surfaces for the range of allowable reinforcement1 to 8 percent for Ordinary and Intermediate moment resisting frames (UBC 1910. The target capacity ratio is taken as 1 when calculating the required reinforcing area.1). Overview Technical Note 10 . Calculate the capacity ratio or the required reinforcing area for the factored axial force and biaxial (or uniaxial) bending moments obtained from each loading combination at each station of the column.©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES. the program can calculate the amount of reinforcing required to design the column.9. CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN UBC97 Technical Note 10 Column Design This Technical Note describes how the program checks column capacity or designs reinforced concrete columns when the UBC97 code is selected. Overview The program can be used to check column capacity or to design columns.

Column Design

Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Figure 1 A Typical Column Interaction Surface

**Generation of Biaxial Interaction Surfaces
**

The column capacity interaction volume is numerically described by a series of discrete points that are generated on the three-dimensional interaction failure surface. In addition to axial compression and biaxial bending, the formulation allows for axial tension and biaxial bending considerations. A typical interaction diagram is shown in Figure 1.

Technical Note 10 - 2

Generation of Biaxial Interaction Surfaces

Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Column Design

The coordinates of these points are determined by rotating a plane of linear strain in three dimensions on the section of the column. See Figure 2. The linear strain diagram limits the maximum concrete strain, εc, at the extremity of the section, to 0.003 (UBC 1910.2.3). The formulation is based consistently upon the general principles of ultimate strength design (UBC 1910.3), and allows for any doubly symmetric rectangular, square, or circular column section. The stress in the steel is given by the product of the steel strain and the steel modulus of elasticity, εsEs, and is limited to the yield stress of the steel, fy (UBC 1910.2.4). The area associated with each reinforcing bar is assumed to be placed at the actual location of the center of the bar and the algorithm does not assume any further simplifications with respect to distributing the area of steel over the cross section of the column, such as an equivalent steel tube or cylinder. See Figure 3. The concrete compression stress block is assumed to be rectangular, with a stress value of 0.85 f c' (UBC 1910.2.7.1). See Figure 3. The interaction algorithm provides correction to account for the concrete area that is displaced by the reinforcement in the compression zone. The effects of the strength reduction factor, ϕ, are included in the generation of the interaction surfaces. The maximum compressive axial load is limited to ϕPn(max), where ϕPn(max) = 0.85ϕ[0.85 f c' (Ag-Ast)+fyAst] (spiral) ϕPn(max) = 0.85ϕ[0.85 f c' (Ag-Ast)+fyAst] (tied) ϕ ϕ = 0.70 for tied columns = 0.75 for spirally reinforced columns (UBC 1910.3.5.1) (UBC 1910.3.5.2) (UBC 1909.3.2.2) (UBC 1909.3.2.2)

The value of ϕ used in the interaction diagram varies from ϕmin to 0.9 based on the axial load. For low values of axial load, ϕ is increased linearly from ϕmin to 0.9 as the nominal capacity ϕPn decreases from the smaller of ϕPb or 0.1 f c' Ag to zero, where Pb is the axial force at the balanced condition. In cases involving axial tension, ϕ is always 0.9 (UBC 1909.3.2.2).

Generation of Biaxial Interaction Surfaces

Technical Note 10 - 3

Column Design

Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Figure 2 Idealized Strain Distribution for Generation of Interaction Surfaces

Technical Note 10 - 4

Generation of Biaxial Interaction Surfaces

5 .” Calculate Column Capacity Ratio Technical Note 10 . The factored moments and corresponding magnification factors depend on the identification of the individual column as either “sway” or “non-sway. defined by the resulting axial load and biaxial moment set. Mux. and Muy. Apply the moment magnification factors to the factored moments. Determine the moment magnification factors for the column moments. The following steps are involved in calculating the capacity ratio of a particular column for a particular loading combination at a particular location: Determine the factored moments and forces from the analysis load cases and the specified load combination factors to give Pu.Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Column Design Figure 3 Idealization of Stress and Strain Distribution in a Column Section Calculate Column Capacity Ratio The column capacity ratio is calculated for each loading combination at each output station of each column. lies within the interaction volume. Determine whether the point.

Also the moment magnification factors in the major and minor directions are in general different. The factored moments are further increased for non-sway columns. The moment obtained from analysis is separated into two components: the sway (Ms) and the non-sway (Ms) components. The sway moments are predominantly caused by lateral loads. The sway components are identified by the “s” subscripts.3.10. For the P-delta analysis. the magnified moments about two axes at any station of a column can be obtained as M = Mns + δsMs.Column Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97 The following three sections describe in detail the algorithms associated with this process.2).75 (1.12.50 live load)/ϕ if seismic load governs.75 (UBC 1910. The moment magnification factors for sway moments.03h) inches.4 dead load + 1. See also White and Hajjar (1991). δs. the load should correspond to a load combination of 0. or (1. where ϕ is the understrength factor for stability. Mux. and for non-sway (individual column stability effect). is taken as 1 because the component moments Ms and Mns are obtained from a “second order elastic (P-delta) analysis. moment magnification factors for moments causing sidesway are taken as unity (UBC 1910. The program assumes that it performs a P-delta analysis and.2 dead load + 0. Determine Moment Magnification Factors The moment magnification factors are calculated separately for sway (overall stability effect). if required.3). to obtain minimum eccentricities of (0.2). δns. For individual columns or column-members in a floor.3) The factor δs is the moment magnification factor for moments causing side sway. giving Pu.7 live load)/ϕ if wind load governs.12. Determine Factored Moments and Forces The factored loads for a particular load combination are obtained by applying the corresponding load factors to all the load cases. which is taken as 0.6 Calculate Column Capacity Ratio .13. The non-sway components which are identified by “ns” subscripts are predominantly caused by gravity load. therefore. and are related to the cause of side-sway. δs.6 + 0.” Technical Note 10 . and Muy. (UBC 1910. where h is the dimension of the column in the corresponding direction (UBC 1910.

7 . Ma / Mb is positive for single curvature bending and negative for double curvature bending.12.12. EI is associated with a particular column direction given by: EI = 0.12.3) Pc = (UBC 1910.4. (UBC 1910. associated with the major or minor direction of the column is given by (UBC 1910.12. Mb maximum factored axial dead load and (UBC 1910. δns.3. δns. Cm can be overwritten by the user on an element-by-element basis. however.12. as follows: Mc = δnsM2 .13.12.12.12.3. Pu 1− 0.3) (UBC 1910.Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Column Design The computed moments are further amplified for individual column stability effect (UBC 1910.1) Ma and Mb are the moments at the ends of the column. where Mc is the factored moment to be used in design. The above expression of Cm is valid if there is no transverse load applied between the supports. The non-sway moment magnification factor. the program allows the user to override this value. and M2 is the larger factored and amplified end moment.75Pc π 2 EI (kl u )2 . If transverse load is present on the span.3) k is conservatively taken as 1.6 + 0.3) βd = maximum factored axial total load Cm = 0. or the length is overwritten.4 Ma ≥ 0. Calculate Column Capacity Ratio Technical Note 10 . where (UBC 1910. 1910. and Mb is numerically larger than Ma.4E c I g 1 + βd .0.5) by the nonsway moment magnification factor.3) δns = Cm ≥ 1.3) (UBC 1910. Cm = 1.

8 Calculate Column Capacity Ratio . The above calculations use the unsupported length of the column.Column Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97 The magnification factor. corresponding to instability in the minor and major directions of the element. respectively. Figure 4 Axes of Bending and Unsupported Length If the program assumptions are not satisfactory for a particular member. Therefore. the user can explicitly specify values of δs and δns. Pu must be less than 0. See Figure 4. δns. These are the lengths between the support points of the element in the corresponding directions. Determine Capacity Ratio The program calculates a capacity ratio as a measure of the stress condition of the column.75Pc. must be a positive number and greater than 1. The capacity ratio is basically a factor that gives an indication Technical Note 10 . The two unsupported lengths are l22 and l33.75Pc. a failure condition is declared. If Pu is found to be greater than or equal to 0.

Before entering the interaction diagram to check the column capacity. This point is determined by three-dimensional linear interpolation between the points that define the Calculate Column Capacity Ratio Technical Note 10 . The point C is defined as the point where the line OL (if extended outwards) will intersect the failure surface.Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Column Design of the stress condition of the column with respect to the capacity of the column.9 . the moment magnification factors are applied to the factored loads to obtain Pu. The point (Pu. if the point lies outside the interaction volume. the column capacity is adequate. however. the column is overstressed. Mux.) is then placed in the interaction space shown as point L in Figure 5. Mux. Figure 5 Geometric Representation of Column Capacity Ratios This capacity ratio is achieved by plotting the point L and determining the location of point C. and Muy. Muy. If the point lies within the interaction volume.

Pu and Vu. See Figure 5. CR. Vc." Design Column Shear Reinforcement The shear reinforcement is designed for each loading combination in the major and minor directions of the column. the point lies within the interaction volume and the column capacity is adequate. The capacity ratio.10 Required Reinforcing Area . in addition to the factored Technical Note 10 . the program computes the reinforcement that will give a column capacity ratio of one. the point lies on the interaction surface and the column is stressed to capacity. the point lies outside the interaction volume and the column is overstressed. that can be resisted by concrete alone.Column Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97 failure surface. Mux. Calculate the reinforcement steel required to carry the balance. calculated as described in the previous section entitled "Calculate Column Capacity Ratio. Note that Pu is needed for the calculation of Vc. For Special and Intermediate moment resisting frames (Ductile frames). is given by the ratio OL . respectively. the shear design of the columns is also based on the probable and nominal moment capacities of the members. Required Reinforcing Area If the reinforcing area is not defined. The following steps are involved in designing the shear reinforcing for a particular column for a particular load combination caused by shear forces in a particular direction: Determine the factored forces acting on the section. If OL < OC (or CR<1). OC If OL = OC (or CR=1). and Muy set and associated load combination number. along with the controlling Pu. If OL > OC (or CR>1). The maximum of all the values of CR calculated from each load combination is reported for each check station of the column. Determine the shear force.

where VP1 = VP2 = − + MI + M J .4. where L Design Column Shear Reinforcement Technical Note 10 . the forces for a particular load combination. the column axial force.5.5. Vp. namely. Then. seismic design) the column is checked for capacity-shear in addition to the requirement for the Ordinary moment resisting frames. Pu.1) Vu = Vp + VD+L (UBC 1921. of the column in a particular direction under the influence of the axial force Pu is calculated using the uniaxial interaction diagram in the corresponding direction.1) where.e. Vu. and L + − MI + M J . The design shear force. For each load combination. is calculated. Vp is the maximum of VP1 and VP2 .Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Column Design moments.4. Effects of the axial forces on the column moment capacities are included in the formulation. the factored axial load. and the column shear force. is then given by (UBC 1921. In the shear design of Special moment resisting frames (i. Therefore.. Mu and Mu .11 . Pu. in a particular direction is calculated from the probable moment capacities of the column associated with the factored axial force acting on the column. Vp is the capacity-shear force obtained by applying the calculated probable ultimate moment capacities at the two ends of the column acting in two opposite directions. Vu. The following three sections describe in detail the algorithms associated with this process. + − the positive and negative moment capacities. The capacity-shear force in a column. Determine Section Forces In the design of the column shear reinforcement of an Ordinary moment resisting concrete frame. in a particular direction are obtained by factoring the program analysis load cases with the corresponding load combination factors.

2) Technical Note 10 .8.0. is calculated as follows: If the column is subjected to axial compression.3).e. M J . Determine Concrete Shear Capacity Given the design force set Pu and Vu. in addition to the check required for Ordinary moment resisting frames.1.0). VD+L is the contribution of shear force from the in-span distribution of gravity loads.3). except the earthquake load factors are doubled (UBC 1921. The factored shear forces are based on the specified load factors.0) moment capacity and factored shear force. = Positive and negative moment capacities at end I of the column using a steel yield stress value of αfy and no ϕ factors (ϕ = 1.. and (UBC 1911.1. α is taken as 1. except that α is taken equal to 1 rather than 1. and L = Clear span of column.12 Design Column Shear Reinforcement . M I . For Special moment resisting frames. the shear force carried by the concrete.Column Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97 + − M I . For Intermediate moment resisting frames. it is zero.2) Acv . The procedure for calculating nominal moment capacity is the same as that for computing the probable moment capacity for special moment resisting frames. f c' ≤ 100 psi.000 Ag where.25 (UBC 1921.25 (UBC 1921. + − M J . i. The design shear force is taken to be the minimum of that based on the nominal (ϕ = 1. the shear capacity of the column is also checked for the capacity-shear based on the nominal moment capacities at the ends and the factored gravity loads. Pu Vc = 2 f c' 1 + 2.0). Vc. = Positive and negative moment capacities at end J of the column using a steel yield stress value of αfy and no ϕ factors (ϕ = 1. For most of the columns.8.3.0). 1921. (UBC 1911. Pu is positive.

5 f c' 1 + Pu 500 Ag Acv . Figure 6 Shear Stress Area. For circular columns.13 .8 times the gross area (UBC 1911.3. Acv is the effective shear area which is Ag shown shaded in Figure 6.6. Acv Design Column Shear Reinforcement Technical Note 10 .2).Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Column Design Vc ≤ 3.2) The term Pu must have psi units. (UBC 1911. Acv is not taken to be greater than 0.2.5.

2) Av = (UBC 1911.5Vu) (UBC 1921. 1911.5. (UBC 1911. Pu.3. Determine Required Shear Reinforcement Given Vu and Vc.2) Vu is limited by the following relationship. is more than half of the total factored maximum shear force over the length of the member Vu(VE ≥ 0.2.6.4.5.2).14 Design Column Shear Reinforcement . 1.3.6.3) For Special moment resisting concrete frame design.60 for seismic design in Seismic Zones 3 and 4 (UBC 1909.5. Vc is set to zero if the factored axial compressive force. VE. (Vu / ϕ-Vc) ≤ 8 f c' Acv (UBC 1911. is given for rectangular and circular columns by the following: Av = (Vu / ϕ − Vc )s .6.5. the strength reduction factor.5.1.2. the required shear reinforcement in the form of stirrups or ties within a spacing. Any minimum stirrup requirements to satisfy spacing considerations or transverse reinforcement volumet- Technical Note 10 . Here ϕ. s. Pu is negative.3) Pu Vc = 2 f c' 1 + 500 Ag Acv ≥ 0 (UBC 1911. for circular columns f ys D' π (UBC 1911. including the earthquake effect is small (Pu < f c' Ag / 20) and if the shear force contribution from earthquake. The maximum of all the calculated values obtained from each load combination are reported for the major and minor directions of the column.6.85 for nonseismic design or for seismic design in Seismic Zones 0.8) Otherwise redimensioning of the concrete section is required.5.3. 1911. and 2 (UBC 1909.4. along with the controlling shear force and associated load combination label. for rectangular columns f ys d 2 (Vu / ϕ − Vc )s .1. The column shear reinforcement requirements reported by the program are based purely on shear strength consideration. is 0.3.1).Column Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97 If the column is subjected to axial tension.3) and is 0.6.2.

F. Vol. No.. American Institute of Steel Construction. 1991. Engineering Journal.15 . D. Hajjar. Reference Technical Note 10 . Inc. and J. 4. Reference White. 28. W. Application of Second-Order Elastic Analysis in LRFD: Research in Practice..Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Column Design ric considerations must be investigated independently of the program by the user.

.

.©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES. The beam design procedure involves the following steps: Design beam flexural reinforcement Design beam shear reinforcement Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement The beam top and bottom flexural steel is designed at check/design stations along the beam span. Overview In the design of concrete beams. and torsion that may exist in the beams must be investigated independently by the user. The reinforcement requirements are calculated at a user-defined number of check/design stations along the beam span. load combination factors and other criteria described herein. Effects caused by axial forces. shears. the program calculates and reports the required areas of steel for flexure and shear based upon the beam moments. and other criteria described below.1 . CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN UBC97 Technical Note 11 Beam Design This Technical Note describes how this program completes beam design when the UBC97 code is selected. INC. The program calculates and reports the required areas of steel for flexure and shear based on the beam moments. minor direction bending. shears. BERKELEY. The following steps are involved in designing the flexural reinforcement for the major moment for a particular beam for a particular section: Determine the maximum factored moments Determine the reinforcing steel Overview Technical Note 11 . All beams are designed for major direction flexure and shear only. load combination factors.

75 times that which can be carried at the balanced condition (UBC 1910. the area of compression reinforcement is calculated assuming that the additional moment will be carried by compression and additional tension reinforcement. or Ordinary moment resisting concrete frame beams.3).3. When the applied moment exceeds the moment capacity at this designed balanced condition. Positive beam moments produce bottom steel. It is assumed that the design ultimate axial force does not exceed 0.3). Negative beam moments produce top steel. Determine Required Flexural Reinforcement In the flexural reinforcement design process. Intermediate.3. In such cases.2). Technical Note 11 . the factored moments for each load combination at a particular beam section are obtained by factoring the corresponding moments for different load cases with the corresponding load factors. The design procedure is based on the simplified rectangular stress block as shown in Figure 1 (UBC 1910. or the grade of concrete. Compression reinforcement is added when the applied design moment exceeds the maximum moment capacity of a singly reinforced section. It is assumed that the compression carried by concrete is less than 0.1 f c' Ag (UBC 1910. the beam may be designed as a Rectangular. The design procedure used by the program for both rectangular and flanged sections (L. all the beams are designed for major direction flexure and shear only.or a T-beam.Beam Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Determine Factored Moments In the design of flexural reinforcement of Special.and T-beams) is summarized below. the width. hence.2 Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement . + The beam section is then designed for the maximum positive M u and maxi− mum negative M u factored moments obtained from all of the load combina- tions. the program calculates both the tension and compression reinforcement. In such cases. The user has the option of avoiding the compression reinforcement by increasing the effective depth. the beam is always designed as a rectangular section.

.7.Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Beam Design Figure 1 Design of a Rectangular Beam Section Design for Rectangular Beam In designing for a factored negative or positive moment.65 ≤ β1 ≤ 0. a=dd2 − 2 Mu 0. d = ε c E s + fy 87.000 d.3 . Also β1 and cb are calculated as follows: f ' − 4. Mu (i.3.2.3) (UBC 1910.000 cb = εc E s 87. 1910. (UBC 1910.90 (UBC 1909. designing top or bottom steel).2.85f c' ϕb .85.2. where the value of ϕ is 0.1) in the above and the following equations.85 .000 + f y 0.3.05 c 1.2.e.4) Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement Technical Note 11 . β1 = 0.0. where.000 . the depth of the compression block is given by a (see Figure 1).

3.003Es .4) The required tensile steel for balancing the compression in concrete is Technical Note 11 . c − (UBC 1910. 1910. If a > amax. or at the top if Mu is negative.Beam Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97 The maximum allowed depth of the compression block is given by amax = 0.75β1cb. Therefore the moment resisted by compression steel and tensile steel is Mus = Mu . This steel is to be placed at the bottom if Mu is positive.85 f c' bamax.Muc.1.3) and is calculated as follows: − The compressive force developed in concrete alone is given by C = 0. where c − d' f s' = 0. compression reinforcement is required (UBC 1910. − So the required compression steel is given by ' As = M us f s' (d − d' )ϕ .3.2.3) If a ≤ amax. (UBC 1910.4 Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement .1) the moment resisted by concrete compression and tensile steel is a Muc = C d − max 2 − ϕ.2. the area of tensile steel reinforcement is given by As = Mu a ϕf y d − 2 .7.2.7. and (UBC 1910.

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Beam Design As1 = Muc a f y d − max ϕ 2 .1) If a ≤ ds. the depth of the compression block is given by a = d . the width of the compression flange is taken as the width of the beam for analysis. The maximum allowed depth of the compression block is given by amax = 0. and total com' ' pression reinforcement is As . Cw. calculation for As is performed in two parts. Mu (i.bw) ds.85 f c' (bf . As is to be placed at bottom and As is to be placed at top if Mu is positive. no T-Beam data is to be used. The first part is for balancing the compressive force from the flange. Design for T-Beam In designing for a factored negative moment. the subsequent calculations for As are exactly the same as previously defined for the rectangular section design. As = As1 + As2. as shown in Figure 2.e. If a > ds.2. f y (d − d' )ϕ − Therefore. and vice versa if Mu is negative. (UBC 1910.7. Cf. and the second part is for balancing the compressive force from the web. Cf is given by Cf = 0. i. However.5 . and the tensile steel for balancing the compression in steel is given by As2 = M us .85f c' ϕbf .e. designing top steel)..75β1cb. If Mu > 0. See Figure 2.d2 − 2M u 0.. the total tensile reinforcement. in this case. Compression reinforcement is required if a > amax. Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement Technical Note 11 . the calculation of the steel area is exactly the same as above.

the value for ϕ is 0.Muf. Mu to be carried by the web is given by Muw = Mu . If a1 ≤ amax. the area of tensile steel reinforcement is then given by Technical Note 11 .90.85f c' ϕbw .Beam Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Figure 2 Design of a T-Beam Section Therefore. the balance of the moment. Therefore. for which the design depth of the compression block is recalculated as a1 = d d2 − 2M uw 0. As1 = given by d Muf = Cf d − s 2 ϕ . Cf fy and the portion of Mu that is resisted by the flange is Again. The web is a rectangular section of dimensions bw and d.6 Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement .

7 .4) The tensile steel for balancing compression in web concrete is As2 = M uc a f y d − max 2 ϕ .2.3) and is calculated as follows: − The compressive force in web concrete alone is given by C = 0. compression reinforcement is required (UBC 1910. c − (UBC 1910.1) − Therefore the moment resisted by concrete web and tensile steel is a Muc = C d − max 2 ϕ.003Es .Muc. and As = As1 + As2. If a1 > amax.Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Beam Design As2 = M uw a ϕf y d − 1 2 . and the tensile steel for balancing compression in steel is Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement Technical Note 11 .3.85 f c' bamax.7. − Therefore. (UBC 1910. and the moment resisted by compression steel and tensile steel is Mus = Muw . where c − d' f s' = 0. This steel is to be placed at the bottom of the T-beam.2. the compression steel is computed as ' As = M us f s' (d − d' )ϕ .

f y (d − d')ϕ − The total tensile reinforcement.3.1) (UBC 1910. As is to be placed at bottom and As is to be placed at top. 1921.3.1) (UBC 1910.Beam Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97 As3 = Mus . the beam design satisfies the following additional conditions (see also Table 1 for comprehensive listing): The minimum longitudinal reinforcement shall be provided at both the top and bottom. Any of the top and bottom reinforcement shall not be less than As(min) (UBC 1921. As = As1 + As2 + As3.2.2.2.3.25 bwd.1) Technical Note 11 .1.3.5.8 Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement . 3 f ' 200 c As(min) ≥ max bw d and bw d or fy fy As(min) ≥ 4 As(required). 1921.2.5.3.3) Special Consideration for Seismic Design For Special moment resisting concrete frames (seismic design). 3 (UBC 1910.1).5.5.1) The beam flexural steel is limited to a maximum given by As ≤ 0. and total compres' ' sion reinforcement is As . (UBC 1921. Minimum Tensile Reinforcement The minimum flexural tensile steel provided in a rectangular section in an Ordinary moment resisting frame is given by the minimum of the two following limits: 3 f ' 200 c As ≥ max bw d and bw d or fy fy As ≥ 4 As(required) 3 (UBC 1910.

0 NLDa Combinations Beam Design Flexure NLDa Combinations NLDa Combinations Beam Min.ρ ≥ 200 fy NLDa Combinations 1% < ρ < 8% Modified NLDa Combinations (earthquake loads doubled) Column Capacity ϕ = 1.0 and ϕ = 1. M u 5 { } END 1 + − max Mu .25 and ϕ = 1.0 plus VD+L Vc = 0 Checked for shear No Requirement No Requirement No Requirement Reported in output file NLDa = Number of specified loading Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement Technical Note 11 .0 and α = 1.0 plus VD+L No Requirement NLDa Combinations Beam Capacity Shear (Vp) with α = 1. Moment Override Check + M uEND ≥ No Requirement + M uSPAN − M uSPAN 1 − M uEND 3 1 + − ≥ max M u .25 NLDa Combinations ρ ≤ 0. Mu 4 1 − − ≥ max Mu .Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Beam Design Table 1 Design Criteria Table Type of Check/ Design Column Check (interaction) Column Design (interaction) Column Shears Ordinary Moment Resisting Frames (Seismic Zones 0&1) NLDa Combinations NLDa Combinations 1% < ρ < 8% Intermediate Moment Resisting Frames (Seismic Zone 2) NLDa Combinations Special Moment Resisting Frames (Seismic Zones 3 & 4) NLDa Combinations NLDa Combinations α = 1.0 and α = 1.9 . Mu 4 { { } } END END Beam Design Shear Joint Design Beam/ Column Capacity Ratio NLDa Combinations Modified NLDa Combinations (earthquake loads doubled) Beam Capacity Shear (Vp) with α = 1. M u 5 + MuEND ≥ { } 1 − MuEND 2 END + MuSPAN ≥ − MuSPAN ≥ 1 + − max M u .0 1% < ρ < 6% NLDa Combinations and Column shear capacity ϕ = 1.025 ρ≥ 3 f c' fy .

the beam design would satisfy the following conditions: At any support of the beam. Vu. the beam positive moment capacity would not be less than 1/3 of the beam negative moment capacity at that end (UBC 1921. associated with the top steel) at that end (UBC 1921. the shear design of the beams is also based on the probable and nominal moment capacities of the members. Neither the negative moment capacity nor the positive moment capacity at any of the sections within the beam would be less than 1/4 of the maximum of positive or negative moment capacities of any of the beam end (support) stations (UBC 1921.e.. seismic design).3. that can be resisted by the concrete.4.1). respectively. the beam positive moment capacity (i. Technical Note 11 . Neither the negative moment capacity nor the positive moment capacity at any of the sections within the beam would be less than 1/5 of the maximum of positive or negative moment capacities of any of the beam end (support) stations (UBC 1921. For Special and Intermediate moment resisting frames (Ductile frames).10 Design Beam Shear Reinforcement . associated with the bottom steel) would not be less than 1/2 of the beam negative moment capacity (i. in addition to the factored load design.4.e.Beam Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97 At any end (support) of the beam.2).2.8.3..e. Determine the shear force. Determine the reinforcement steel required to carry the balance. Vc.1).8. Design Beam Shear Reinforcement The shear reinforcement is designed for each load combination at a userdefined number of stations along the beam span.2.2). For Intermediate moment resisting concrete frames (i.. The following steps are involved in designing the shear reinforcement for a particular beam for a particular load combination at a particular station resulting from the beam major shear: Determine the factored shear force.

Determine Shear Force and Moment In the design of the beam shear reinforcement of an Ordinary moment resisting concrete frame. The capacity-shear force. is calculated from the probable moment capacities of each end of the beam and the gravity shear forces. with top steel in tension.1) Vu = Vp + VD+L (UBC 1921.0). seismic design). Design Beam Shear Reinforcement Technical Note 11 . Vp.11 . See also Table 1 for details.1) where Vp is the capacity shear force obtained by applying the calculated probable ultimate moment capacities at the two ends of the beams acting in opposite directions. Vp is the maximum of VP1 and VP2 . This check is performed in addition to the design check required for Ordinary moment resisting frames. Therefore.Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Beam Design The following three sections describe in detail the algorithms associated with this process.e. the shear capacity of the beam is also checked for the capacity-shear associated with the probable moment capacities at the ends and the factored gravity load. where VP1 = VP2 = − MI − + MI + M J . the shear forces and moments for a particular load combination at a particular beam section are obtained by factoring the associated shear forces and moments with the corresponding load combination factors..4. In the design of Special moment resisting concrete frames (i. and L + − MI + M J . The design shear force Vu is then given by (UBC 1921.3. where L = Moment capacity at end I. The procedure for calculating the design shear force in a beam from probable moment capacity is the same as that described for a column in section “Design Column Shear Reinforcement” in Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 10 Column Design.3.4. using a steel yield stress value of αfy and no ϕ factors (ϕ = 1.

0).1.3). (UBC 1911. − MJ = Moment capacity at end J.25 (UBC 1921. The computation of the design shear force in a beam of an Intermediate moment resisting frame is also the same as that for columns. VD+L is the contribution of shear force from the in-span distribution of gravity loads. except the earthquake load factors are doubled (UBC 1921. using a steel yield stress value of αfy and no ϕ factors (ϕ = 1.1) For Special moment resisting frame concrete design. + MI = Moment capacity at end I. Determine Concrete Shear Capacity The allowable concrete shear capacity is given by Vc = 2 f c' bwd.3). and L = Clear span of beam.Beam Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97 + MJ = Moment capacity at end J.0). which is described in Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Technical Note 10 Column Design. 1921. using a steel yield stress value of αfy and no ϕ factors (ϕ = 1. in addition to the check required for Ordinary moment resisting frames. with bottom steel in tension.0) moment capacity is the same as that for computing the probable moment capacity for Special moment resisting frames.0). The procedure for calculating nominal (ϕ = 1. The design shear force in beams is taken to be the minimum of that based on the nominal moment capacity and factored shear force. with bottom steel in tension. For Special moment resisting frames. is less than f c' Ag/20 and the shear force contribution from earthquake VE is Technical Note 11 . Vc is set to zero if both the factored axial compressive force.8.25 (UBC 1921. including the earthquake effect Pu.3.8. Also see Table 1 for details. The factored shear forces are based on the specified load factors. except that α is taken equal to 1 rather than 1. the shear capacity of the beam is also checked for the capacity shear based on the nominal moment capacities at the ends and the factored gravity loads. using a steel yield stress value of αfy and no ϕ factors (ϕ = 1.12 Design Beam Shear Reinforcement .0).0. For Intermediate moment resisting frames. α is taken as 1. with top steel in tension.

Concrete Frame Design UBC97

Beam Design

more than half of the total maximum shear force over the length of the member Vu (i.e., VE ≥ 0.5Vu) (UBC 1921.3.4.2).

**Determine Required Shear Reinforcement
**

Given Vu and Vc, the required shear reinforcement in area/unit length is calculated as Av = (Vu / ϕ − Vc )s . f ys d (UBC 1911.5.6.1, 1911.5.6.2)

The shear force resisted by steel is limited by (Vu/ϕ - Vc) ≤ 8 f c' bd. (UBC 1911.5.6.8)

Otherwise, redimensioning of the concrete section is required. Here ϕ, the strength reduction factor, is 0.85 for nonseismic design or for seismic design in Seismic Zones 0, 1, and 2 (UBC 1909.3.2.3) and is 0.60 for seismic design in Seismic Zones 3 and 4 (UBC 1909.3.4.1). The maximum of all the calculated Av values, obtained from each load combination, is reported along with the controlling shear force and associated load combination number. The beam shear reinforcement requirements displayed by the program are based purely on shear strength considerations. Any minimum stirrup requirements to satisfy spacing and volumetric considerations must be investigated independently of the program by the user.

Design Beam Shear Reinforcement

Technical Note 11 - 13

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN UBC97

**Technical Note 12 Joint Design
**

This Technical Note explains how the program performs a rational analysis of the beam-column panel zone to determine the shear forces that are generated in a joint. The program then checks this against design shear strength.

Overview

To ensure that the beam-column joint of special moment resisting frames possesses adequate shear strength, the program performs a rational analysis of the beam-column panel zone to determine the shear forces that are generated in the joint. The program then checks this against design shear strength. Only joints having a column below the joint are designed. The material properties of the joint are assumed to be the same as those of the column below the joint. The joint analysis is completed in the major and the minor directions of the column. The joint design procedure involves the following steps: • • • Determine the panel zone design shear force,Vuh Determine the effective area of the joint Check panel zone shear stress

The algorithms associated with these three steps are described in detail in the following three sections.

**Determine the Panel Zone Shear Force
**

Figure 1 illustrates the free body stress condition of a typical beam-column intersection for a column direction, major or minor.

Overview

Technical Note 12 - 1

2 Determine the Panel Zone Shear Force .Joint Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Figure1 Beam-Column Joint Analysis Technical Note 12 .

The program first calculates the maximum compression. that can be carried by the beam. ignoring compression reinforcement as follows. C max = 0.Vu The location of C or T forces is determined by the direction of the moment. Noting that TL = CL and TR = CR. The forces Pu and Vu are axial force and shear force. thereby contributing force components to the analysis. The moments MuL and MuR are obtained from the beams framing into the joint.85f c' bd Mmax = C max d 2 Then the program conservatively determines C and T forces as follows: abs( M ) C = T = C max 1 − 1 − M max The program resolves the moments and the C and T forces from beams that frame into the joint in a direction that is not parallel to the major or minor directions of the column along the direction that is being investigated. Mmax. Cmax. The magnitude of C or T forces is conservatively determined using basic principles of ultimate strength theory. The program calculates the joint shear force Vuh by resolving the moments into C and T forces.1). The program calculates the column shear force Vu from the beam moment capacities. α. MuL and MuR.5. and the maximum moment. In the design of special moment resisting concrete frames.Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Joint Design The force Vuh is the horizontal panel zone shear force that is to be calculated. Also. the program calculates the C and T for the positive and negative moments.1. The forces that act on the joint are Pu. The C and T forces are based on these moment capacities.3 . Vuh = TL + TR . from the column framing into the top of the joint. respectively. Vu. the evaluation of the design shear force is based on the moment capacities (with reinforcing steel overstrength factor. and no ϕ factors) of the beams framing into the joint (UBC 1921. as follows: Determine the Panel Zone Shear Force Technical Note 12 . considering the fact that the concrete cover may be different for the direction of moment.

Joint Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Vu = Mu + Mu H L R See Figure 2.4 Determine the Panel Zone Shear Force . It should be noted that the points of inflection shown on Figure 2 are taken as midway between actual lateral support points for the columns. the shear force from the top of the column is taken as zero. If there is no column at the top of the joint. Figure 2 Column Shear Force Vu Technical Note 12 .

3). The joint area for joint shear along the major and minor directions is calculated separately (ACI R21.3): v = { 20ϕ 15ϕ 12ϕ f 'c f 'c f 'c for joints confined on all four sides for joints confined on three faces or on two opposite faces for all other joints where ϕ = 0.3. the above assumptions may be unconservative and the user should investigate the acceptability of the particular joint.5.1) A beam that frames into a face of a column at the joint is considered in this program to provide confinement to the joint if at least three-quarters of the face of the joint is covered by the framing member (UBC 1921.85 (by default). (UBC 1909.3. It should be noted that if the beam frames into the joint eccentrically. as illustrated in Case 1 and Case 2 of Figure 1.1).5.5 . The effective width of the joint area to be used in the calculation is limited to the width of the beam plus the depth of the column.5. The dimensions of the rectangle correspond to the major and minor dimensions of the column below the joint. Determine the Effective Area of Joint The joint area that resists the shear forces is assumed always to be rectangular in plan view. are investigated and the design is based on the maximum of the joint shears obtained from the two cases.3.2.4. except if the beam framing into the joint is very narrow.1909.Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Joint Design The effects of load reversals. Check Panel Zone Shear Stress The panel zone shear stress is evaluated by dividing the shear force Vuh by the effective area of the joint and comparing it with the following design shear strengths (UBC 1921. The area of the joint is assumed not to exceed the area of the column below. Determine the Effective Area of Joint Technical Note 12 .3.

the moment capacity of each column under the influence of the corresponding axial load Pu is then determined separately for the major and minor directions of the column. the axial force.5. The beam capacities are calculated for reversed situations (Cases 1 and 2) as illustrated in Figure 1 and the maximum summation obtained is used. The moment capacities of beams that frame into the joint in a direction that is not parallel to the major or minor direction of the column are resolved along the direction that is being investigated and the resolved components are added to the summation. α.3.2).6 Beam/Column Flexural Capacity Ratios .2.2. the following UBC provision needs to be satisfied (UBC 1921. Technical Note 12 .3 / 4 f c' f c' with (UBC 1921.2) The capacities are calculated with no reinforcing overstrength factor. using the uniaxial column interaction diagram. and including ϕ factors. For Special Moment-Resisting Frames. the joint shear stress. ∑Me ≥ 6 ∑Mg 5 (UBC 1921.4. The moment capacities of the two columns are added to give the capacity summation for the corresponding load combination. The maximum capacity summations obtained from all of the load combinations is used for the beam/column capacity ratio. Pu. see Figure 3. the design shear strength of the joint is reduced in the program to at least three-quarters of that of the normal weight concrete by replacing the minf cs. the program reports the joint shear. For each load combination. The column capacity summation includes the column above and the column below the joint. in each of the columns is calculated from the program analysis load combinations.Joint Design Concrete Frame Design UBC97 For light-weight aggregate concrete. Beam/Column Flexural Capacity Ratios At a particular joint for a particular column direction. the program will calculate the ratio of the sum of the beam moment capacities to the sum of the column moment capacities. major or minor.4. factor f ' c . the allowable joint shear stress and a capacity ratio. For each load combination.2) For joint design.

If this ratio is greater than 5/6.7 . Figure 3 Moment Capacity Mu at a Given Axial Load Pu Beam/Column Flexural Capacity Ratios Technical Note 12 .Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Joint Design The beam/column flexural capacity ratios are only reported for Special Moment-Resisting Frames involving seismic design load combinations. a warning message is printed in the output file.

.

See Technical Note 8. Further information about using the Print Design Tables form is presented at the end of this Technical Note. The input can be printed to a printer or to a text file when you click the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design command. other. Compressive strength reduction factor for tied columns. Input Data The program provides the printout of the input data in a series of tables. A printout of the input data provides the user with the opportunity to carefully review the parameters that have been input into the program and upon which program design is based.1 . snow. live. wind. The column headings for input data and a description of what is included in the columns of the tables are provided in Table 1 of this Technical Note. CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN UBC97 Technical Note 13 Input Data This Technical Note describes the concrete frame design input data for UBC97. earthquake.. Load type: dead. INC. Bending strength reduction factor. Shear strength reduction factor. Load combination scale factor. Load Combination Multipliers Code Preferences Phi_bending Phi_tension Phi_compression (Tied) Phi_compression (Spiral) Phi_shear Input Data Technical Note 13 . superimposed dead.©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES. Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Input Data COLUMN HEADING Combo Type Case Factor DESCRIPTION Design load combination. Name of load case. BERKELEY. Compressive strength reduction factor for reinforced columns. reduced live load. Tensile strength reduction factor.

2 Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Input Data .Input Data Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Input Data COLUMN HEADING DESCRIPTION Concrete. Label applied to section. steel. other. steel. Material label. Technical Note 13 . Used to calculate self-mass of structure. Isotropic or orthotropic. Concrete. Concrete. other. Material Property Data Material Name Material Type Design Type Modulus of Elasticity Poisson's Ratio Thermal Coeff Shear Modulus Coefficient of thermal expansion. Shear strength reduction factor for light weight concrete. other. Material Property Mass and Weight Material Name Mass Per Unit Vol Weight Per Unit Vol Material Name Lightweight Concrete Concrete FC Rebar FY Rebar FYS Lightwt Reduc Fact Concrete compressive strength. Material Design Data for Concrete Materials Concrete Column Property Data Section Label Mat Label Column Depth Column Width Rebar Pattern Concrete Cover Bar Area Layout of main flexural reinforcing steel.0. Shear reinforcing steel yield strength. Bending reinforcing steel yield strength. default = 1. Minimum clear concrete cover. steel. Area of individual reinforcing bar to be used. Used to calculate self-weight of structure.

Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Input Data Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Input Data COLUMN HEADING Story ID Column Line Section ID Framing Type RLLF Factor L_Ratio Major L_Ratio Minor K Major K Minor Story ID Bay ID Section ID Framing type RLLF Factor L_Ratio Major L_Ratio Minor Unbraced length about major axis. default = 1. Lateral or gravity. Unbraced length about major axis. Click the Cancel button rather than the OK button to cancel the print. Concrete Column Design Element Information Concrete Beam Design Element Information Using the Print Design Tables Form To print steel frame design input data directly to a printer. Unbraced length about minor axis. click the Print to File check box on the Print Design Tables form. Unbraced length about minor axis. DESCRIPTION Column assigned to story level at top of column. Effective length factor.0. Section number assigned to beam. Name of section assigned to column. if necessary. Effective length factor. Lateral or gravity. To print steel frame design input data to a file. default = 1.3 . Grid lines locating beam. Click the OK button to send the print to your printer. Grid line. Story level at which beam occurs.0. Use the File menu > Print Setup command and the Setup>> button to change printers. use the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design command and click the check box on the Print Design Tables form. Click the Filename>> button to change the Using the Print Design Tables Form Technical Note 13 .

the Selection Only check box will be checked.txt. Or use the Filename>> button to locate another file. Technical Note 13 . Click the OK buttons on the Open File for Printing Tables form and the Print Design Tables form to complete the request. Data will be added to this file. click Yes to replace the existing file.g. The Append check box allows you to add data to an existing file. Note: The File menu > Display Input/Output Text Files command is useful for displaying output that is printed to a text file. Use the appropriate file extension for the desired format (e. .4 Using the Print Design Tables Form . . If you select a specific frame element(s) before using the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design command.xls. and when the Open File for Printing Tables caution box appears.doc). The print will be for the selected beam(s) only.. The path and filename of the current file is displayed in the box near the bottom of the Print Design Tables form. .Input Data Concrete Frame Design UBC97 path or filename.

The design output is printed when you click the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design command and select Output Summary of the Print Design Tables dialog box.1 . Load combination for which the reinforcing is designed.©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES.. INC. The program provides the output data in a series of tables. Table 1 Concrete Column Design Output COLUMN HEADING Story ID Column Line Section ID Station ID DESCRIPTION Column assigned to story level at top of column. The column headings for output data and a description of what is included in the columns of the tables are provided in Table 1 of this Technical Note. CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN UBC97 Technical Note 14 Output Details This Technical Note describes the concrete frame design output for UBC97 that can be printed to a printer or to a text file. Load combination for which the reinforcing is designed. Shear reinforcing required. Grid lines. Table 1 Concrete Column Design Output Technical Note 14 . Further information about using the Print Design Tables dialog box is presented at the end of this Technical Note. Name of section assigned to column. Shear reinforcing required. Biaxial P-M Interaction and Shear Design of Column-Type Elements Required Reinforcing Longitudinal Combo Shear22 Combo Shear33 Area of longitudinal reinforcing required. BERKELEY.

Load combination upon which the ratio of factored load versus allowed capacity is based. Table 2 Concrete Column Joint Output COLUMN HEADING DESCRIPTION Beam to Column Capacity Ratios and Joint Shear Capacity Check Story ID Column Line Section ID Story level at which joint occurs. Minor Combo Joint Shear Capacity Ratios Major Combo Ratio of factored load versus allowed capacity. Load combination upon which the ratio of factored load versus allowed capacity is based.2 Table 2 Concrete Column Joint Output . Beam-Column Capacity Ratios Major Combo Ratio of beam moment capacity to column capacity. Ratio of beam moment capacity to column capacity. Minor Combo Technical Note 14 . Load combination upon which the ratio of beam moment capacity to column capacity is based. Load combination upon which the ratio of beam moment capacity to column capacity is based. Ratio of factored load versus allowed capacity. Assigned section name.Output Details Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Table 1 Concrete Column Design Output COLUMN HEADING Combo DESCRIPTION Load combination for which the reinforcing is designed. Grid line.

Or use the Filename>> button to locate another file. click the Print to File check box on the Print Design Tables dialog box. . use the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design command and click the check box on the Print Design Tables dialog box. Note: The File menu > Display Input/Output Text Files command is useful for displaying output that is printed to a text file.xls.Concrete Frame Design UBC97 Output Details Using the Print Design Tables Form To print concrete frame design input data directly to a printer. Use the File menu > Print Setup command and the Setup>> button to change printers. The print will be for the selected beam(s) only. . Data will be added to this file. Click the OK button to send the print to your printer.doc). Click the OK buttons on the Open File for Printing Tables dialog box and the Print Design Tables dialog box to complete the request. If you select a specific frame element(s) before using the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design command. . the Selection Only check box will be checked. if necessary.g. and when the Open File for Printing Tables caution box appears. To print concrete frame design input data to a file. Click the Cancel button rather than the OK button to cancel the print.txt. The Append check box allows you to add data to an existing file.3 . Use the appropriate file extension for the desired format (e. click Yes to replace the existing file. Click the Filename>> button to change the path or filename. The path and filename of the current file is displayed in the box near the bottom of the Print Design Tables dialog box. Using the Print Design Tables Form Technical Note 14 ..

.

and Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Technical Note 22 Joint Design. Special (high seismic risk areas) moment resisting frames as required for seismic design provisions. INC. The program provides options to design or check Earthquake resisting frames. The various notations used in this series are listed herein. Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Technical Note 20 Column Design. It also provides input and output data summaries. CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN ACI-318-99 Technical Note 15 General and Notation Introduction to the ACI318-99 Series of Technical Notes The ACI-318-99 Concrete Frame Design series of Technical Notes describes in detail the various aspects of the concrete design procedure that is used by this program when the user selects the ACI-318-99 Design Code (ACI 1999). Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Technical Note 21 Beam Design. which are described in Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Technical Note 16 Preferences and Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Technical Note 17 Overwrites. The details of the design criteria used for the different framing systems are described in Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Technical Note 19 Strength Reduction Factors. Intermediate (moderate seismic risk areas). which are described in Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Technical Note 23 Input Data and Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Technical Note 24 Output Details. and Earthquake resisting frames. English as well as SI and MKS metric units can be used for input. But the code is based on Inch-Pound-Second units. all equations and descriptions presented in this chapter correspond to Inch-Pound-Second units unless otherwise noted. Earthquake resisting frames. The design is based on user-specified loading combinations. Introduction to the ACI318-99 Series of Technical Notes Technical Note 15 .1 . For simplicity. The program uses preferences and overwrites. The program provides a set of default load combinations that should satisfy requirements for the design of most building type structures. BERKELEY. See Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Technical Note 18 Design Load Combination for more information.©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES.. Ordinary.

sq-in Area of compression reinforcement. assumed as 29. sq-in Gross area of concrete.2) Moment of inertia of gross concrete section about centroidal axis.General and Notation Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Notation Acv Ag As ' As Area of concrete used to determine shear stress. dependent upon column curvature. sq-in Area of tension reinforcement. in4 Clear unsupported length.000. sq-in Coefficient. neglecting reinforcement.000 psi (ACI 8. lb-in Larger factored end moment in a column. lb-in As(required) Ast Av Cm Ec Es Ig Ise L M1 M2 Mc Mns Ms Technical Note 15 . sq-in Area of shear reinforcement. lb-in Sway component of factored end moment. sq-in Area of steel required for tension reinforcement. psi Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement. in Smaller factored end moment in a column.2 Notation . sq-in Total area of column longitudinal reinforcement. in4 Moment of inertia of reinforcement about centroidal axis of member cross section. used to calculate moment magnification factor Modulus of elasticity of concrete.5. lb-in Factored moment to be used in design. lb-in Nonsway component of factored end moment.

lb-in Factored moment at section about Y-axis. lb Shear force caused by earthquake loads. in Effective width of flange (T-Beam section). lb Axial load capacity at zero eccentricity. in Distance from compression face to tension reinforcement. lb Depth of compression block. lb-in Axial load capacity at balanced strain conditions. in Notation Technical Note 15 . in Width of member. lb-in Factored moment at section about X-axis. lb Factored axial load at section. lb Shear resisted by concrete. lb Critical buckling strength of column. in Depth to neutral axis at balanced conditions. in Concrete cover to center of reinforcing. lb Factored shear force at a section. in Depth of compression block at balanced condition. in Depth to neutral axis. lb Shear force computed from probable moment capacity.3 .Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 General and Notation Mu Mux Muy Pb Pc Pmax P0 Pu Vc VE VD+L Vu Vp a ab b bf bw c cb d d' Factored moment at section. in Width of web (T-Beam section). lb Maximum axial load strength allowed. lb Shear force from span loading.

000 psi (ACI 9. in Specified compressive strength of concrete.4 Notation . psi fy ≤ 80.General and Notation Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 ds f c' fy Thickness of slab (T-Beam section). psi Specified yield strength of flexural reinforcement. in Reinforcing steel overstrength factor Absolute value of ratio of maximum factored axial dead load to maximum factored axial total load Absolute value of ratio or maximum factored axial dead load to maximum factored axial total load Moment magnification factor for sway moments Moment magnification factor for nonsway moments Strain in concrete Strain in reinforcing steel Strength reduction factor fys h k r α β1 βd δs δns εc εs ϕ Technical Note 15 .4) Specified yield strength of shear reinforcement. in Effective length factor Radius of gyration of column section. psi Dimension of column.

©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES, INC., BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001

CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN ACI318-99

**Technical Note 16 Preferences
**

This Technical Note describes the items in the Preferences form.

General

The concrete frame design preferences in this program are basic assignments that apply to all concrete frame elements. Use the Options menu > Preferences > Concrete Frame Design command to access the Preferences form where you can view and revise the concrete frame design preferences. Default values are provided for all concrete frame design preference items. Thus, it is not required that you specify or change any of the preferences. You should, however, at least review the default values for the preference items to make sure they are acceptable to you.

**Using the Preferences Form
**

To view preferences, select the Options menu > Preferences > Concrete Frame Design. The Preferences form will display. The preference options are displayed in a two-column spreadsheet. The left column of the spreadsheet displays the preference item name. The right column of the spreadsheet displays the preference item value. To change a preference item, left click the desired preference item in either the left or right column of the spreadsheet. This activates a drop-down box or highlights the current preference value. If the drop-down box appears, select a new value. If the cell is highlighted, type in the desired value. The preference value will update accordingly. You cannot overwrite values in the dropdown boxes. When you have finished making changes to the composite beam preferences, click the OK button to close the form. You must click the OK button for the changes to be accepted by the program. If you click the Cancel button to exit

General

Technical Note 16 - 1

Preferences

Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99

the form, any changes made to the preferences are ignored and the form is closed.

Preferences

For purposes of explanation in this Technical Note, the preference items are presented in Table. The column headings in the table are described as follows: Item: The name of the preference item as it appears in the cells at the left side of the Preferences form. Possible Values: The possible values that the associated preference item can have. Default Value: The built-in default value that the program assumes for the associated preference item. Description: A description of the associated preference item.

**Table 1: Concrete Frame Preferences
**

Item Design Code Possible Values Any code in the program >0 >0 >0 >0 ≥4.0 Default Value ACI 318-99 Description Design code used for design of concrete frame elements. Unitless strength reduction factor per ACI 9.3. Unitless strength reduction factor per ACI 9.3. Unitless strength reduction factor per ACI 9.3. Unitless strength reduction factor per ACI 9.3. Number of equally spaced interaction curves used to create a full 360-degree interaction surface (this item should be a multiple of four). We recommend that you use 24 for this item.

Phi Bending Tension Phi Compression Tied Phi Compression Spiral Phi Shear Number Interaction Curves

0.9 0.7 0.75 0.85 24

Technical Note 16 - 2

Preferences

Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99

Preferences

**Table 1: Concrete Frame Preferences
**

Item Possible Values Default Value 11 Description Number of points used for defining a single curve in a concrete frame interaction surface (this item should be odd). Toggle for design load combinations that include a time history designed for the envelope of the time history, or designed step-by-step for the entire time history. If a single design load combination has more than one time history case in it, that design load combination is designed for the envelopes of the time histories, regardless of what is specified here.

Number Inter- Any odd value action Points ≥4.0 Time History Design Envelopes or Step-by-Step

Envelopes

Preferences

Technical Note 16 - 3

.

at least review the default values for the overwrite items to make sure they are acceptable. An explanation of how to change an overwrite is provided at the end of this Technical Note. Default values are provided for all overwrite items. that is. select an element and click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > View/Revise Overwrites command. Description: A description of the associated overwrite item. The column headings in the table are described as follows. To save space in the formes. To access the overwrites. CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN ACI318-99 Technical Note 17 Overwrites General The concrete frame design overwrites are basic assignments that apply only to those elements to which they are assigned. these names are generally short. When changes are made to overwrite items. Overwrites Technical Note 17 . Default Value: The default value that the program assumes for the associated overwrite item. you do not need to specify or change any of the overwrites.1 . BERKELEY. This Technical Note describes concrete frame design overwrites for ACI318-99. Thus. INC. the overwrites are presented in Table 1. Possible Values: The possible values that the associated overwrite item can have. However.. the program applies the changes only to the elements to which they are specifically assigned.©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES. to the elements that are selected when the overwrites are changed. Item: The name of the overwrite item as it appears in the program. Overwrites For explanation purposes in this Technical Note.

1. Factor relating actual moment diagram to an equivalent uniform moment diagram.Overwrites Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Overwrites Item Element Section Sway Special.3.0 >0 ≤1. 1. Sway Intermediate.12. See ACI 10.1.0 1 1. Sway Ordinary NonSway >0 ≤1.0 1 1 1 1 1 See ACI 10. Sway Special Frame type per moment frame definition given in ACI 21.0 >0 ≤1.13 and Figure R10. Used to reduce the live load contribution to the factored loading.1.0 >0 ≤1.12.0 >0 ≤1.12. Factor relating actual moment diagram to an equivalent uniform moment diagram. 10.12. See ACI 10.12.12.0 1.0 >0 ≤1.3. See ACI 10.0 >0 ≤1. Possible Values Default Value Description Element Type Live Load Reduction Factor Horizontal Earthquake Factor Unbraced Length Ratio (Major) Unbraced Length Ratio (Minor) Effective Length Factor (K Major) Effective Length Factor (K Minor) Moment Coefficient (Cm Major) Moment Coefficient (Cm Minor) NonSway Moment Factor (Dns Major) Technical Note 17 . See ACI 10.0 >0 ≤1.2 Overwrites .0 >0 ≤1.12.13 and Figure R10. 10.

The values of the overwrite items are visible in the second column of the spreadsheet if only one element was selected before the overwrites form was accessed.Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 Overwrites Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Overwrites Item NonSway Moment Factor (Dns Minor) Sway Moment Factor (Ds Major) Sway Moment Factor (Ds Minor) Possible Values Default Value 1 Description See ACI 10. 1 See ACI 10. The right column of the spreadsheet contains the overwrites values.13.3 . Making Changes in the Overwrites Form To access the concrete frame overwrites. Initially. select an element and click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > View/Revise Overwrites command. If the drop-down box appears. The names of the overwrite items are displayed in the first column of the spreadsheet. no values show for the overwrite items in the second column of the spreadsheet. 1 See ACI 10. After selecting one or multiple elements.13.13. select a value from Overwrites Technical Note 17 . Then left click in either column of the spreadsheet to activate a drop-down box or highlight the contents in the cell in the right column of the spreadsheet. the check boxes in the Concrete Frame Design Overwrites form are all unchecked and all of the cells in the spreadsheet have a gray background to indicate that they are inactive and the items in the cells cannot be changed. The overwrites are displayed in the form with a column of check boxes and a two-column spreadsheet. If multiple elements were selected. check the box to the left of an overwrite item to change it. The left column of the spreadsheet contains the name of the overwrite item.

edb file used to initialize the model. When you reset overwrites. not to the values that were in the . the program resets the overwrite values to its built-in values. You cannot change the values of the dropdown boxes. click the OK button to close the form. any changes made to the overwrites are ignored and the form is closed. If the cell contents is highlighted. The concrete frame overwrite values that were in a .Overwrites Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 the box. The program then changes all of the overwrite items whose associated check boxes are checked for the selected members. You must click the OK button for the changes to be accepted by the program. If you click the Cancel button to exit the form. All current design results will be deleted when this command is executed. The overwrite will reflect the change.4 Overwrites . Important note about resetting overwrites: The program defaults for the overwrite items are built into the program.edb file that you used to initialize your model may be different from the built-in program default values. When changes to the overwrites have been completed. type in the desired value. Technical Note 17 . Resetting Concrete Frame Overwrites to Default Values Use the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Reset All Overwrites command to reset all of the steel frame overwrites.

9 DL ± 1. For the ACI 318-99 code. BERKELEY.4 DL + 1.75 (1.4 DL 1.1).1 EL) (ACI 9.2.2) (ACI 9.9 DL ± 1.7 LL ± 1. if the structure is subjected to wind (WL) and earthquake (EL) loads and considering that wind and earthquake forces are reversible.©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES. CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN ACI-318-99 Technical Note 18 Design Load Combinations The design load combinations are the various combinations of the prescribed load cases for which the structure needs to be checked. the stress check may need only one load combination.3 * 1. See Concrete Frame Design ACI 318-99 Technical Note 17 Overwrites for more information.2.1) (ACI 9. INC.2.3 WL 0. in addition to the dead and live loads.7 LL ± 1.7 * 1.3). The user is warned that the above load combinations involving seismic loads consider service-level seismic forces. 1.1 EL 0.7 LL (ACI 9.4 DL + 1.7 WL) 0.2.7 LL 0.4 DL + 1. if a structure is subjected to dead load (DL) and live load (LL) only.4 DL + 1.2).. Different load factors may apply with strength-level seismic forces (ACI R9.3) These are also the default design load combinations in the program whenever the ACI 318-99 code is used. Live load reduction factors can be applied to the member forces of the live load condition on an element-by-element basis to reduce the contribution of the live load to the factored loading. namely 1. However.1 . Design Load Combinations Technical Note 18 . the following load combinations should be considered (ACI 9.2.75 (1.

.

70 for axial compression. are applied on the nominal strength to obtain the design strength provided by a member.2. INC.2) = 0.3) ϕ ϕ Strength Reduction Factors Technical Note 19 .3. and axial compression and flexure (tied column) (ACI 9. ϕ.2) = 0.2. and torsion are as follows: ϕ ϕ ϕ ϕ = 0.3.2..1) (ACI 9.2.3.85 for shear and torsion (ACI 9. BERKELEY. and axial compression and flexure (spirally reinforced column) (ACI 9.3.90 for flexure = 0.90 for axial tension = 0.2.3.3. The ϕ factors for flexure. CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN ACI-318-99 Technical Note 19 Strength Reduction Factors The strength reduction factors.1 .90 for axial tension and flexure (ACI 9.75 for axial compression.2.2) (ACI 9.©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES. axial force. shear.2) = 0.

.

Overview Technical Note 20 . When the steel is undefined. Design the column shear reinforcement.©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES.4.1 . the program will check the column capacity.. Calculate the capacity ratio or the required reinforcing area for the factored axial force and biaxial (or uniaxial) bending moments obtained from each loading combination at each station of the column. Alternatively. INC. The target capacity ratio is taken as one when calculating the required reinforcing area.9. the program can calculate the amount of reinforcing required to design the column.3. If you define the geometry of the reinforcing bar configuration of each concrete column section. CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN ACI-318-99 Technical Note 20 Column Design This Technical Note describes how the program checks column capacity or designs reinforced concrete columns when the ACI-318-99 code is selected. The following four sections describe in detail the algorithms associated with this process. BERKELEY.1) and 1 to 6 percent for Special moment resisting frames (ACI 21. Overview The program can be used to check column capacity or to design columns. A typical biaxial interaction surface is shown in Figure 1. The design procedure for the reinforced concrete columns of the structure involves the following steps: Generate axial force/biaxial moment interaction surfaces for all of the different concrete section types of the model.1). the program generates the interaction surfaces for the range of allowable reinforcement 1 to 8 percent for Ordinary and Intermediate moment resisting frames (ACI 10.

2 Generation of Biaxial Interaction Surfaces . A typical interaction diagram is shown in Figure 1.Column Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Figure 1 A Typical Column Interaction Surface Generation of Biaxial Interaction Surfaces The column capacity interaction volume is numerically described by a series of discrete points that are generated on the three-dimensional interaction failure surface. the formulation allows for axial tension and biaxial bending considerations. See Figure 2. The Technical Note 20 . The coordinates of these points are determined by rotating a plane of linear strain in three dimensions on the section of the column. In addition to axial compression and biaxial bending.

The maximum compressive axial load is limited to ϕPn(max).1).3. For low values of axial load.75 for spirally reinforced columns. at the extremity of the section. In cases involving axial tension. square.2).2.2. The area associated with each reinforcing bar is assumed to be placed at the actual location of the center of the bar and the algorithm does not assume any further simplifications with respect to distributing the area of steel over the cross section of the column. Generation of Biaxial Interaction Surfaces Technical Note 20 . (ACI 10. to 0. ϕ is always ϕ(flexure).2. See Figure 3.3.1) (ACI 10.3). The ϕ factor used in calculating ϕPn and ϕPb is the ϕ(compression).003 (ACI 10.5.3.2) (ACI 9. The formulation is based consistently upon the general principles of ultimate strength design (ACI 10.2.3). or circular column section. which is 0.Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Column Design linear strain diagram limits the maximum concrete strain. ϕ. εsEs. ϕ ϕ = = 0. The stress in the steel is given by the product of the steel strain and the steel modulus of elasticity. fy (ACI 10.80ϕ[0. and 0. The interaction algorithm provides correction to account for the concrete area that is displaced by the reinforcement in the compression zone. are included in the generation of the interaction surfaces.2) The value of ϕ used in the interaction diagram varies from ϕ(compression) to ϕ(flexure) based on the axial load. where ϕPn(max) = 0.2) (ACI 9.2. and is limited to the yield stress of the steel.70 for tied columns. εc.3.3 .85ϕ[0.7. such as an equivalent steel tube or cylinder.9 by default (ACI 9.4). with a stress value of 0. The concrete compression stress block is assumed to be rectangular.85 f c' (ACI 10. ϕPn(max) = 0.85 f c' (Ag-Ast)+fyAst] tied column.5. where ϕPb is the axial force at the balanced condition.85 f c' (Ag-Ast)+fyAst] spiral column.2.1 f c' Ag to zero. ϕ is increased linearly from ϕ(compression) to ϕ(flexure) as the ϕPn decreases from the smaller of ϕPb or 0.3. See Figure 3. The effects of the strength reduction factor. and allows for any doubly symmetric rectangular.

4 Generation of Biaxial Interaction Surfaces .Column Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Figure 2 Idealized Strain Distribution for Generation of Interaction Source Technical Note 20 .

” The following three sections describe in detail the algorithms associated with this process. and Muy. The following steps are involved in calculating the capacity ratio of a particular column for a particular load combination at a particular location: Determine the factored moments and forces from the analysis load cases and the specified load combination factors to give Pu. Calculate Column Capacity Ratio Technical Note 20 . Determine the moment magnification factors for the column moments. defined by the resulting axial load and biaxial moment set. Apply the moment magnification factors to the factored moments.5 . Mux. The factored moments and corresponding magnification factors depend on the identification of the individual column as either “sway” or “non-sway.Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Column Design Figure 3 Idealization of Stress and Strain Distribution in a Column Section Calculate Column Capacity Ratio The column capacity ratio is calculated for each load combination at each output station of each column. lies within the interaction volume. Determine whether the point.

Also. The moment magnification factors for sway moments. where h is the dimension of the column in the corresponding direction (ACI 10.4. Mux.4. The program assumes that it performs a P-delta analysis and. is taken as 1 because the component moments Ms and Mns are obtained from a “second order elastic (P-delta) analysis” (ACI R10. The default moment of inertia factor in this program is 1. therefore. R10. which are identified by “ns” subscripts.13.0.2).11).3) The factor δs is the moment magnification factor for moments causing side sway. The user should use reduction factors for the moment of inertias in the program as specified in ACI 10. and are related to the cause of side sway. and Muy. are predominantly caused by gravity load. if required.13. The sway components are identified by the “s” subscripts. Determine Moment Magnification Factors The moment magnification factors are calculated separately for sway (overall stability effect).Column Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Determine Factored Moments and Forces The factored loads for a particular load combination are obtained by applying the corresponding load factors to all the load cases.12.13.13). the load should correspond to a load combination of 1.3. the moment magnification factors in the major and minor directions are in general different (ACI 10.6 Calculate Column Capacity Ratio . The non-sway components.10.0. Technical Note 20 .10.6).1.1). δs. giving Pu. R10. R10.6+0.2). δs and for non-sway (individual column stability effect).11.13.03h) inches.1). See also White and Hajjar (1991).7 live load (ACI 10. moment magnification factor δs for moments causing side-sway is taken as unity (ACI 10. The moment of inertia reduction for sustained lateral load involves a factor βd (ACI 10. δns.12. the magnified moments about two axes at any station of a column can be obtained as M = Mns + δsMs. 10. The factored moments are further increased for non-sway columns.13. For individual columns or column-members in a floor.3. This βd for sway frame in second-order analysis is different from the one that is defined later for non-sway moment magnification (ACI 10.10. For the P-delta analysis. The moment obtained from analysis is separated into two components: the sway (Ms) and the non-sway (Mns) components. R10. The sway moments are predominantly caused by lateral loads.4 dead load + 1. (ACI 10. 10. to obtain minimum eccentricities of (0.

Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Column Design The computed moments are further amplified for individual column stability effect (ACI 10. and Mb is numerically larger than Ma.3) Cm = 0.4 (ACI 10.3) k is conservatively taken as 1. The two unsupported lengths are l22 and l33. respectively.3) Mc is the factored moment to be used in design.12. as follows: Mc = δnsM. where (ACI 10.12. Pc = π 2 EI (kl u )2 . δns. where (ACI 10. or the length is overwritten. The user can overwrite Cm on an element-byelement basis.0. Cm=1.12. however.12.12. associated with the major or minor direction of the column is given by (ACI 10.3. Ma / Mb is positive for single curvature bending and negative for double curvature bending. δns. corresponding to instability in the minor and major directions of the element.7 .3.3) δns = Cm ≤ 1. The non-sway moment magnification factor. 10. If transverse load is present on the span. lu is the unsupported length of the column for the direction of bending considered.1) Ma and Mb are the moments at the ends of the column. Mb (ACI 10. These are the lengths Calculate Column Capacity Ratio Technical Note 20 .12.75Pc Ma ≥ 0. where Pu 1− 0.1). the program allows the user to override this value (ACI 10.12.6 +0.5) by the nonsway moment magnification factor.13. See Figure 4.4. The above expression of Cm is valid if there is no transverse load applied between the supports.

a failure condition is declared. must be a positive number and greater than one.12.Column Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Figure 4 Axes of Bending and Unsupported Length between the support points of the element in the corresponding directions.R10. δns.3) The magnification factor.8 Calculate Column Capacity Ratio . EI is associated with a particular column direction: EI = 0. Pu must be less than 0. If Pu is found to be greater than or equal to 0.0.12.3) βd = maximum factored axial sustained (dead) load maximum factored axial total load (ACI 10. Therefore.4E c I g 1 + βd .75Pc. where (ACI 10. Technical Note 20 .75Pc.

lu. is given by the ratio . if the point lies outside the interaction volume. and Muy set and associated load combination number.9 . the user can explicitly specify values of δs and δns. Calculate Column Capacity Ratio Technical Note 20 . The maximum of all the values of CR calculated from each load combination is reported for each check station of the column along with the controlling Pu. the point lies outside the interaction volume and the column is overstressed. The point (Pu. Muy) is then placed in the interaction space shown as point L in Figure 5. the column is overstressed. See Figure 5. The point C is defined as the point where the line OL (if extended outwards) will intersect the failure surface. If the program assumptions are not satisfactory for a particular member. Mux. If OL < OC (or CR<1). δns. the moment magnification factors are applied to the factored loads to obtain Pu. The capacity ratio is basically a factor that gives an indication of the stress condition of the column with respect to the capacity of the column. The capacity ratio. however. This point is determined by three-dimensional linear interpolation between the points that define the failOL ure surface. This capacity ratio is achieved by plotting the point L and determining the location of point C. CR. That means that δs. and Pc assume different values for major and minor directions of bending.Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Column Design The above calculations are performed for major and minor directions separately. the point lies within the interaction volume and the column capacity is adequate. OC If OL = OC (or CR=1). the point lies on the interaction surface and the column is stressed to capacity. If OL > OC (or CR>1). Mux. a capacity ratio is calculated. Mux. k. If the point lies within the interaction volume. Cm. Before entering the interaction diagram to check the column capacity. the column capacity is adequate. and Muy. EI. Determine Capacity Ratio As a measure of the stress condition of the column.

the program computes the reinforcement that will give a column capacity ratio of one. The following steps are involved in designing the shear reinforcing for a particular column for a particular load combination resulting from shear forces in a particular direction: Technical Note 20 .10 Required Reinforcing Area ." Design Column Shear Reinforcement The shear reinforcement is designed for each load combination in the major and minor directions of the column. calculated as described in the previous section entitled "Calculate Column Capacity Ratio.Column Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Figure 5 Geometric Representation of Column Capacity Ratio Required Reinforcing Area If the reinforcing area is not defined.

1) Vu = Vp + VD+L (ACI 21. Determine Section Forces In the design of the column shear reinforcement of an Ordinary moment resisting concrete frame.e. is then given by (ACI 21. in a particular direction is calculated from the probable moment capacities of the column associated with the factored axial force acting on the column. the shear design of the columns is also based on the Probable moment and nominal moment capacities of the members. The following three sections describe in detail the algorithms associated with this process. Vp is the capacity shear force obtained by applying the calculated probable ultimate moment capacities at the two ends of the column acting Design Column Shear Reinforcement Technical Note 20 . Determine the shear force. The design shear force. the column axial force. For each load combination. is calculated.4. in a particular direction are obtained by factoring the program analysis load cases with the corresponding load combination factors.11 . namely.Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Column Design Determine the factored forces acting on the section. and the column shear force. For Special and Intermediate moment resisting frames (Ductile frames). The capacity shear force in a column.1) where. Mu and Mu . that can be resisted by concrete alone. the column is checked for capacity shear in addition to the requirement for the Ordinary moment resisting frames. Note that Pu is needed for the calculation of Vc.. seismic design).5. Pu and Vu. of the column in a particular direction under the influence of the axial force Pu is calculated using the uniaxial interaction diagram in the corresponding direction. Vu. the forces for a particular load combination. Pu. respectively. Vu. Vp. Effects of the axial forces on the column moment capacities are included in the formulation. Pu. Calculate the reinforcement steel required to carry the balance. the factored axial load. Then. + − the positive and negative moment capacities.5. in addition to the factored moments.4. Vc. In the shear design of Special moment resisting frames (i.

where VP1 = VP2 = − + MI + M J . the shear force carried by the concrete. + − MJ . R21. MI .5.3.b).3. The modified factored shear forces are based on the specified load factors. The design shear force is taken to be the minimum of that based on the nominal (ϕ = 1. For most of the columns. Vc. VD+L is the contribution of shear force from the in-span distribution of gravity loads.4.12 Design Column Shear Reinforcement .0).a.10). R21. For Intermediate moment resisting frames. Vp is the maximum of VP1 and VP2 . Determine Concrete Shear Capacity Given the design force set Pu and Vu.10.10. MJ . except the earthquake load factors are doubled (ACI 21. the shear capacity of the column is also checked for the capacity shear based on the nominal moment capacities at the ends and the factored gravity loads. in addition to the check required for Ordinary moment resisting frames. Therefore. it is zero. except that α is taken equal to 1 rather than 1.1).0).Column Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 in two opposite directions. and L + − MI + M J .0.25 (ACI 21. is calculated as follows: Technical Note 20 .0) moment capacity and modified factored shear force. For Special moment resisting frames α is taken as 1. = Positive and negative moment capacities at end I of the column using a steel yield stress value of αfy and no ϕ factors (ϕ = 1. The procedure for calculating nominal moment capacity is the same as that for computing the probable moment capacity for special moment resisting frames. = Positive and negative moment capacities at end J of the column using a steel yield stress value of αfy and no ϕ factors (ϕ = 1.25 (ACI 10. and L = Clear span of column. where L + − MI .

for circular columns. R11.Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Column Design If the column is subjected to axial compression.3.1.3. Acv is the effective shear area.e.4.2.2).13 .3. is given for rectangular and circular columns by Av = (Vu / ϕ − Vc )s .2) Av = (ACI 11. which is shown shaded in Figure 6. Determine Required Shear Reinforcement Given Vu and Vc. VE.1.6.1.3) Vu is limited by the following relationship.2. is more than half of the total factored maximum shear force over the length of the member Vu (VE ≥ 0. Acv. 11.5Vu) (ACI 21.2) (ACI 11.6.5.2) The term Pu / Ag must have psi units.3. f ys (0.3) For Special moment resisting concrete frame design.000 Ag f c' ≤ 100 psi. For circular columns. Pu Vc = 2 f c' 1 + 2.9) Design Column Shear Reinforcement Technical Note 20 .3. Pu is positive. for rectangular columns and f ys d (Vu / ϕ − Vc )s .3).8D) (ACI 11. 11. Acv is taken to be equal to the gross area of the section (ACI 11.5. is small (Pu < f c' Ag / 20) and if the shear force contribution from earthquake.2) (ACI 11. Pu. If the column is subjected to axial tension.5. i.3.5 f c' 1 + Pu 500 Ag Acv.3.6.5. (Vu / ϕ-Vc) ≤ 8 f c' Acv (ACI 11..5.6. including the earthquake effect. Vc is set to zero if the factored axial compressive force. where (ACI 11.3. s. Pu is negative Vc = 2 f c' 1 + Pu 500 Ag Acv ≥ 0 (ACI 11. the required shear reinforcement in the form of stirrups or ties within a spacing. and Vc ≤ 3.

The maximum of all the calculated Av values obtained from each load combination are reported for the major and minor directions of the column. Acv Otherwise. Any minimum stirrup requirements to satisfy spacing considerations or transverse reinforcement volumetric considerations must be investigated independently of the program by the user.Column Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Figure 6 Shear Stress Area.85 (ACI 9. Here ϕ.3). the strength reduction factor.2. redimensioning of the concrete section is required.3. Technical Note 20 . The column shear reinforcement requirements reported by the program are based purely on shear strength consideration. is 0.14 Design Column Shear Reinforcement . along with the controlling shear force and associated load combination label.

Inc.Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Column Design Reference White. American Institute of Steel Construction.W. 28. D. No. Hajjar. Application of Second-Order Elastic Analysis in LRFD: Research to Practice. 4.F. Engineering Journal.15 . Reference Technical Note 20 . Vol. and J. 1991.

.

load combination factors. minor direction bending. The beam design procedure involves the following steps: Design beam flexural reinforcement Design beam shear reinforcement Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement The beam top and bottom flexural steel is designed at check/design stations along the beam span. The program calculates and reports the required areas of steel for flexure and shear based on the beam moments.1 . The reinforcement requirements are calculated at a user-defined number of check/design stations along the beam span. All beams are designed for major direction flexure and shear only.©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES.. and torsion that may exist in the beams must be investigated independently by the user. Overview In the design of concrete beams. CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN ACI-318-99 Technical Note 21 Beam Design This Technical Note describes how this program completes beam design when the ACI 318-99 code is selected. the program calculates and reports the required areas of steel for flexure and shear based on the beam moments. and other criteria described below. load combination factors and other criteria described herein. shears. The following steps are involved in designing the flexural reinforcement for the major moment for a particular beam for a particular section: Determine the maximum factored moments Determine the reinforcing steel Overview Technical Note 21 . INC. shears. BERKELEY. Effects resulting from any axial forces.

+ The beam section is then designed for the maximum positive M u and maxi− mum negative M u factored moments obtained from all of the load combina- tions. Technical Note 21 . The user has the option of avoiding the compression reinforcement by increasing the effective depth.3).and T-beams) is summarized below. the beam may be designed as a Rectangular.3). the program calculates both the tension and compression reinforcement.2). The design procedure is based on the simplified rectangular stress block as shown in Figure 1 (ACI 10. When the applied moment exceeds the moment capacity at this designed balanced condition.Beam Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Determine Factored Moments In the design of flexural reinforcement of Special. or Ordinary moment resisting concrete frame beams. Compression reinforcement is added when the applied design moment exceeds the maximum moment capacity of a singly reinforced section.2 Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement . the width. or the grade of concrete. In such cases. The design procedure used by this program for both rectangular and flanged sections (L. the factored moments for each load combination at a particular beam section are obtained by factoring the corresponding moments for different load cases with the corresponding load factors.1 f c' Ag (ACI 10. Positive beam moments produce bottom steel.3. In such cases. It is assumed that the compression carried by concrete is less than 0. Negative beam moments produce top steel. the area of compression reinforcement is calculated assuming that the additional moment will be carried by compression and additional tension reinforcement.75 times that which can be carried at the balanced condition (ACI 10. all the beams are designed for major direction flexure and shear only. Intermediate. It is assumed that the design ultimate axial force does not exceed 0. the beam is always designed as a rectangular section. hence.3. Determine Required Flexural Reinforcement In the flexural reinforcement design process.or a T-beam.

4) Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement Technical Note 21 . the value of ϕ is 0.65 ≤ β1 ≤ 0.90 (ACI 9.1) in the above and the following equations. the depth of the compression block is given by a (see Figure 1).1) where.Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Beam Design Figure 1 Design of Rectangular Beam Section Design for Rectangular Beam In designing for a factored negative or positive moment. designing top or bottom steel). β1 = 0. 87.2.3) (ACI 10.85-0.2.3.000 d = d.85.85f c ϕb .2.3 .2. Mu (i.e.3. 0.7.7.05 c 1.2. 10. Also β1 and cb are calculated as follows: f ' − 4.. where. (ACI 10.000 .000 + f y ε c E s + fy (ACI 10. a=dd2 − 2 Mu 1 0.000 cb = εc Es 87.

3.Muc.3.7.4 Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement .2.7.2. This steel is to be placed at the bottom if Mu is positive. Therefore the moment resisted by compression steel and tensile steel is Mus = Mu . the area of tensile steel reinforcement is then given by As = Mu a ϕf y d − 2 .75β1cb.3) If a ≤ amax. 10.3) and is calculated as follows: − The compressive force developed in concrete alone is given by C = 0. and (ACI 10.85 f c' bamax.003Es .Beam Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 The maximum allowed depth of the compression block is given by amax = 0. or at the top if Mu is negative. (ACI 10.4) The required tensile steel for balancing the compression in concrete is Technical Note 21 . If a > amax. − So the required compression steel is given by ' As = M us f s' (d − d' )ϕ . c − (ACI 10.2. where c − d' f s' = 0. compression reinforcement is required (ACI 10.1.1) the moment resisted by concrete compression and tensile steel is a Muc = C d − max 2 − ϕ.

in this case the width of the compression flange is taken as the width of the beam for analysis. designing top steel).85 f c' (bf .5 . Cf is given by Cf = 0.e. • Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement Technical Note 21 . See Figure 2. 10. (ACI 10. and total ' ' compression reinforcement is As .2. and vice versa if Mu is negative. f y (d − d' )ϕ − Therefore. If Mu > 0. Cw. as shown in Figure 2. the depth of the compression block is given by a=dd2 − 2Mu 0.. and the tensile steel for balancing the compression in steel is given by As2 = M us . no T-Beam data is to be used.1. As is to be placed at bottom and As is to be placed at top if Mu is positive. Design for T-Beam In designing for a factored negative moment.e.7. the total tensile reinforcement. Compression reinforcement is required if a > amax. Mu (i. calculation for As is performed in two parts. and the second part is for balancing the compressive force from the web.75β1cb.3) • If a ≤ ds. The maximum allowed depth of compression block is given by amax = 0. the calculation of the steel area is exactly the same as above. Cf. If a > ds.. The first part is for balancing the compressive force from the flange.Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Beam Design As1 = M uc a f y d − max ϕ 2 .bw)ds.3. However. the subsequent calculations for As are exactly the same as previously defined for the rectangular section design.85f c' ϕbf . As = As1 + As2. i.

85f ci ϕbw . The web is a rectangular section of dimensions bw and d.6 Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement . for which the design depth of the compression block is recalculated as a1 = d d2 − 2Muw 0.Beam Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Figure 2 Design of a T-Beam Section Therefore. Therefore.Muf.90 by default. the balance of the moment. and Technical Note 21 . Mu to be carried by the web is given by Muw = Mu . As1 = given by d Muf = Cf d − s ϕ. the value for ϕ is ϕ(flexure). which is 0. Cf fy and the portion of Mu that is resisted by the flange is If a1 ≤ amax. the area of tensile steel reinforcement is then given by As2 = Muw a ϕf y d − 1 2 . 2 Again.

Muc.3) and is calculated as follows: − The compressive force in web concrete alone is given by C = 0.Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Beam Design As = As1 + As2. and 2 the moment resisted by compression steel and tensile steel is Mus = Muw .2. compression reinforcement is required (ACI 10.2.1) − Therefore. the compression steel is computed as ' As = Mus f s' (d − d' )ϕ .3.4) The tensile steel for balancing compression in web concrete is As2 = Muc . If a1 > amax. This steel is to be placed at the bottom of the T-beam. and amax )ϕ f y (d − 2 the tensile steel for balancing compression in steel is As3 = Mus .85 f c' bamax. where c − d' f s' = 0. − Therefore.7 . (ACI 10. c − (ACI 10. the moment resisted by concrete web and tensile steel is a Muc = C d − max ϕ .003Es .7. f y (d − d' )ϕ Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement Technical Note 21 .

.2.3.e.5. (ACI 10. associated with the bottom steel) would not be less than 1/2 of the beam negative moment capacity (i. and total ' compression reinforcement is As . Neither the negative moment capacity nor the positive moment capacity at any of the sections within the beam would be less than 1/4 of the Technical Note 21 .Beam Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 − The total tensile reinforcement.2.2).e.5.. (ACI 21.1) At any end (support) of the beam. 3 (ACI 10.5. Any of the top and bottom reinforcement shall not be less than As(min) (ACI 21.5. As = As1 + As2 + As3. As is to be placed at bottom and ' As is to be placed at top.3.2.1) (ACI 10.1) (ACI 10.025 bwd. the beam positive moment capacity (i.8 Design Beam Flexural Reinforcement .3) Special Consideration for Seismic Design For Special moment resisting concrete frames (seismic design).3) The beam flexural steel is limited to a maximum given by As ≤ 0. associated with the top steel) at that end (ACI 21. the beam design satisfies the following additional conditions (see also Table 1): The minimum longitudinal reinforcement shall be provided at both the top and bottom. Minimum Tensile Reinforcement The minimum flexural tensile steel provided in a rectangular section in an Ordinary moment resisting frame is given by the minimum of the two following limits: 3 f ' 200 c As ≥ max bw d and bw d or fy fy As ≥ (4/3)As(required).3. 3 f ' 200 c As(min) ≥ max bw d and bw d or fy fy As(min) ≥ 4 As(required).1).

1).4.9 .2). The following three sections describe in detail the algorithms associated with this process. Vu.1). in addition to the factored load design.10. Design Beam Shear Reinforcement Technical Note 21 ..10.4. Design Beam Shear Reinforcement The shear reinforcement is designed for each load combination at a user defined number of stations along the beam span. Determine the shear force. the beam positive moment capacity would not be less than 1/3 of the beam negative moment capacity at that end (ACI 21. respectively. the shear design of the beams is also based upon the probable and nominal moment capacities of the members.Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Beam Design maximum of positive or negative moment capacities of any of the beam end (support) stations (ACI 21. For Intermediate moment resisting concrete frames (i. For Special and Intermediate moment resisting frames (ductile frames).e.3. that can be resisted by the concrete. The following steps are involved in designing the shear reinforcement for a particular beam for a particular load combination at a particular station due to the beam major shear: • • • Determine the factored shear force. Neither the negative moment capacity nor the positive moment capacity at any of the sections within the beam would be less than 1/5 of the maximum of positive or negative moment capacities of any of the beam end (support) stations (ACI 21. seismic design). the beam design would satisfy the following conditions: At any support of the beam. Determine the reinforcement steel required to carry the balance. Vc.2.

0 NLDa Combinations α = 1.25 and ϕ = 1. M u END } } END + MuSPAN − MuSPAN { } 1 ≥ max{ . Moment Override Check + M uEND ≥ No Requirement + MuSPAN − M uSPAN { 1 ≥ max{ M 5 1 − M u END 3 1 + − ≥ max M u .10 Design Beam Shear Reinforcement . ρ ≥ 200 fy Beam Min. M } M 4 − u 1 − M u END 2 1 + − ≥ max Mu .0 1% < ρ < 6% NLDa Combinations Column shear capacity ϕ = 1.0 and α = 1.0 and ϕ = 1.Beam Design Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Table 1 Design Criteria Table Type of Check/ Design Column Check (interaction) Column Design (interaction) Ordinary Moment Resisting Frames (non-Seismic) NLDa Combinations Intermediate Moment Resisting Frames (Seismic) NLDa Combinations Special Moment Resisting Frames (Seismic) NLDa Combinations NLDa Combinations 1% < ρ < 8% NLDa Combinations 1% < ρ < 8% Modified NLDa Combinations (earthquake loads doubled) Column capacity ϕ = 1.0 plus VD+L Vc = 0 Checked for shear Joint Design Beam/Column Capacity Ratio No Requirement No Requirement No Requirement Reported in output file NLDa = Number of specified loading Technical Note 21 . Mu 4 END − u END Beam Design Shear NLDa Combinations Modified NLDa Combinations (earthquake loads doubled) Beam Capacity Shear (Vp) with α = 1.025 ρ≥ 3 f c' fy Column Shears NLDa Combinations Beam Design Flexure NLDa Combinations NLDa Combinations .25 NLDa Combinations ρ ≤ 0.0 and α = 1.0 plus VD+L No Requirement NLDa Combinations Beam Capacity Shear (Vp) with α = 1. M u 5 + M uEND ≥ + − u .

Vp is the maximum of VP1 and VP2 .1) • where Vp is the capacity shear force obtained by applying the calculated probable ultimate moment capacities at the two ends of the beams acting in two opposite directions.4. + MJ = Moment capacity at end J. See also Table 1 for details. where VP1 VP2 − MI = − + MI + MJ . using a steel yield stress value of αfy and no ϕ factors (ϕ = 1. The capacity shear force.4.e. Therefore.1) Vu = Vp + VD+L (ACI 21. In the design of Special moment resisting concrete frames (i.3. the shear capacity of the beam is also checked for the capacity shear resulting from the probable moment capacities at the ends and the factored gravity load. with bottom steel in tension. This check is performed in addition to the design check required for Ordinary moment resisting frames. seismic design). is calculated from the probable moment capacities of each end of the beam and the gravity shear forces. the shear forces and moments for a particular load combination at a particular beam section are obtained by factoring the associated shear forces and moments with the corresponding load combination factors. The procedure for calculating the design shear force in a beam from probable moment capacity is the same as that described for a column in section “Design Column Shear Reinforcement” of Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 Technical Note 20 Column Design. with top steel in tension.3.0). where L = = Moment capacity at end I. Design Beam Shear Reinforcement Technical Note 21 ..11 . using a steel yield stress value of αfy and no ϕ factors (ϕ = 1. and L + − MI + MJ . The design shear force Vu is then given by (ACI 21.Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99 Beam Design Determine Shear Force and Moment • In the design of the beam shear reinforcement of an Ordinary moment resisting concrete frame. Vp.0).

Beam Design

Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99

+ MI

= Moment capacity at end I, with bottom steel in tension, using a steel yield stress value of αfy and no ϕ factors (ϕ = 1.0),

− MJ

**= Moment capacity at end J, with top steel in tension, using a
**

steel yield stress value of αfy and no ϕ factors (ϕ = 1.0), and = Clear span of beam.

L

For Special moment resisting frames α is taken as 1.25 (ACI 21.0, R21.3.4.1). VD+L is the contribution of shear force from the in-span distribution of gravity loads.

•

For Intermediate moment resisting frames, the shear capacity of the beam is also checked for the capacity shear based on the nominal moment capacities at the ends and the factored gravity loads, in addition to the check required for Ordinary moment resisting frames. The design shear force in beams is taken to be the minimum of that based on the nominal moment capacity and modified factored shear force. The procedure for calculating nominal (ϕ = 1.0) moment capacity is the same as that for computing the probable moment capacity for Special moment resisting frames, except that α is taken equal to 1 rather than 1.25 (ACI 21.10.3.a, R21.10). The modified factored shear forces are based on the specified load factors, except the earthquake load factors are doubled (ACI 21.10.3.b). The computation of the design shear force in a beam of an Intermediate moment resisting frame is the same as described for columns in section “Determine Section Forces” of Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 Technical Note 20 Column Design. See also Table 1 for details.

**Determine Concrete Shear Capacity
**

The allowable concrete shear capacity is given by Vc = 2 f c' bwd. (ACI 11.3.1.1)

For Special moment resisting frame concrete design, Vc is set to zero if both the factored axial compressive force, including the earthquake effect Pu, is less than f c' Ag/20 and the shear force contribution from earthquake VE is more than half of the total maximum shear force over the length of the member Vu (i.e., VE ≥ 0.5Vu) (ACI 21.3.4.2).

Technical Note 21 - 12

Design Beam Shear Reinforcement

Concrete Frame Design ACI-318-99

Beam Design

**Determine Required Shear Reinforcement
**

Given Vu and Vc, the required shear reinforcement in area/unit length is calculated as Av = (Vu / ϕ − Vc )s . f ys d (ACI 11.5.6.1, 11.5.6.2)

The shear force resisted by steel is limited by (Vu / ϕ - Vc) ≤ 8 f c' bd. (ACI 11.5.6.9)

Otherwise, redimensioning of the concrete section is required. Here, ϕ, the strength reduction factor for shear, is 0.85 by default (ACI 9.3.2.3). The maximum of all the calculated Av values, obtained from each load combination, is reported along with the controlling shear force and associated load combination number. The beam shear reinforcement requirements displayed by the program are based purely on shear strength considerations. Any minimum stirrup requirements to satisfy spacing and volumetric considerations must be investigated independently of the program by the user.

Design Beam Shear Reinforcement

Technical Note 21 - 13

The joint design procedure involves the following steps: Determine the panel zone design shear force. The program then checks this against design shear strength. major or minor.©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES. Overview To ensure that the beam-column joint of special moment resisting frames possesses adequate shear strength. The program then checks this against design shear strength. Vuh Determine the effective area of the joint Check panel zone shear stress The algorithms associated with these three steps are described in detail in the following three sections. The material properties of the joint are assumed to be the same as those of the column below the joint. The joint analysis is completed in the major and the minor directions of the column.1 . Determine the Panel Zone Shear Force Figure 1 illustrates the free body stress condition of a typical beam-column intersection for a column direction. BERKELEY.. Overview Technical Note 22 . INC. Only joints having a column below the joint are designed. CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN ACI318-99 Technical Note 22 Joint Design This Technical Note explains how the program performs a rational analysis of the beam-column panel zone to determine the shear forces that are generated in a joint. the program performs a rational analysis of the beam-column panel zone to determine the shear forces that are generated in the joint.

2 Determine the Panel Zone Shear Force .Joint Design Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 Figure 1 Beam-Column Joint Analysis Technical Note 22 .

C max = 0. Mmax. and the maximum moment. and no ϕ factors) of the beams framing into the joint (ACI 21.Vu The location of C or T forces is determined by the direction of the moment.1. In the design of special moment resisting concrete frames.5.85f ' c bd Mmax = C max d 2 Then the program conservatively determines C and T forces as follows: abs( M ) C = T = C max 1 − 1 − M max The program resolves the moments and the C and T forces from beams that frame into the joint in a direction that is not parallel to the major or minor directions of the column along the direction that is being investigated. from the column framing into the top of the joint. thereby contributing force components to the analysis. respectively. UBC 1921. Vuh = TL + TR .5. The C and T force are based on these moment capacities. The forces that act on the joint are Pu. The forces Pu and Vu are axial force and shear force.Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 Joint Design The force Vuh is the horizontal panel zone shear force that is to be calculated.1.3 . Also. considering the fact that the concrete cover may be different for the direction of moment. The program calculates the column shear force Vu from the beam moment capacities. Cmax.1.1). Vu. the evaluation of the design shear force is based on the moment capacities (with reinforcing steel overstrength factor. The magnitude of C or T forces is conservatively determined using basic principles of ultimate strength theory. The moments MuL and MuR are obtained from the beams framing into the joint. the program calculates the C and T for the positive and negative moments. The program calculates the joint shear force Vuh by resolving the moments into C and T forces. α. that can be carried by the beam. Noting that TL = CL and TR = CR. MuL and MuR. ignoring compression reinforcement as follows. The program first calculates the maximum compression. as follows: Determine the Panel Zone Shear Force Technical Note 22 .

The area of the joint is assumed not to exceed the area of the column below. If there is no column at the top of the joint.5. The effects of load reversals.5.4 Determine the Effective Area of Joint . as illustrated in Case 1 and Case 2 of Figure 1.3): v = { 20ϕ 15ϕ 12ϕ f 'c f 'c f 'c for joints confirmed on all four sides for joints confirmed on three faces or on two opposite faces for all other joints Technical Note 22 . It should be noted that the points of inflection shown on Figure 2 are taken as midway between actual lateral support points for the columns.3. the shear force from the top of the column is taken as zero. The dimensions of the rectangle correspond to the major and minor dimensions of the column below the joint.Joint Design Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 Vu = Mu + Mu H L R See Figure 2. The joint area for joint shear along the major and minor directions is calculated separately (ACI R21. the above assumptions may be unconservative and the user should investigate the acceptability of the particular joint. The effective width of the joint area to be used in the calculation is limited to the width of the beam plus the depth of the column. UBC 1921. It should be noted that if the beam frames into the joint eccentrically. except if the beam framing into the joint is very narrow.3).5. Determine the Effective Area of Joint The joint area that resists the shear forces is assumed always to be rectangular in plan view. are investigated and the design is based on the maximum of the joint shears obtained from the two cases. Check Panel Zone Shear Stress The panel zone shear stress is evaluated by dividing the shear force Vuh by the effective area of the joint and comparing it with the following design shear strengths (ACI 21.

5.3.Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 Joint Design Figure 2 Column Shear Force Vu where ϕ = 0. UBC 1921.3.85 (by default).3.1909.5 . UBC 1909.2.3.3.1.5.2. Determine the Effective Area of Joint Technical Note 22 .4. (ACI 9.1).1) A beam that frames into a face of a column at the joint is considered in this program to provide confinement to the joint if at least three-quarters of the face of the joint is covered by the framing member (ACI 21.3.3.

and including ϕ factors. Pu. The maximum capacity summations obtained from all of the load combinations is used for the beam/column capacity ratio. major or minor.2.2. Beam/Column Flexural Capacity Ratios At a particular joint for a particular column direction. the program reports the joint shear. UBC 1921. the moment capacity of each column under the influence of the corresponding axial load Pu is then determined separately for the major and minor directions of the column.3 / 4 f c' For joint design. ∑Me ≥ 6 ∑Mg 5 (ACI 21. α . Technical Note 22 .5.2) The capacities are calculated with no reinforcing overstrength factor.4.3. For each load combination. For each load combination. using the uniaxial column interaction diagram. see Figure 3.2).2.2) minf cs. The moment capacities of beams that frame into the joint in a direction that is not parallel to the major or minor direction of the column are resolved along the direction that is being investigated and the resolved components are added to the summation.6 Beam/Column Flexural Capacity Ratios .4. the axial force.3. The moment capacities of the two columns are added to give the capacity summation for the corresponding load combination. the allowable joint shear stress and a capacity ratio.5. the design shear strength of the joint is reduced in the program to at least three-quarters of that of the normal weight concrete by replacing the f c' with (ACI 21. the joint shear stress. the program will calculate the ratio of the sum of the beam moment capacities to the sum of the column moment capacities (ACI 21. The column capacity summation includes the column above and the column below the joint. The beam capacities are calculated for reversed situations (Cases 1 and 2) as illustrated in Figure 1 and the maximum summation obtained is used.Joint Design Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 For light-weight aggregate concrete. in each of the columns is calculated from the program analysis load combinations. factor f c' .

7 . If this ratio is greater than 5/6.Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 Joint Design The beam/column flexural capacity ratios are only reported for Special Moment-Resisting Frames involving seismic design load combinations. a warning message is printed in the output file. Figure 3 Moment Capacity Mu at a Given Axial Load Pu Beam/Column Flexural Capacity Ratios Technical Note 22 .

.

Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Input Data COLUMN HEADING Combo Type Case Factor DESCRIPTION Design load combination. reduced live load. The input can be printed to a printer or to a text file when you click the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design command. live. Bending strength reduction factor. The column headings for input data and a description of what is included in the columns of the tables are provided in Table 1 of this Technical Note. Input Data The program provides the printout of the input data in a series of tables. snow. Further information about using the Print Design Tables form is presented at the end of this Technical Note. INC. Name of load case.. A printout of the input data provides the user with the opportunity to carefully review the parameters that have been input into the program and upon which program design is based. Compressive strength reduction factor for tied columns. Load Combination Multipliers Code Preferences Phi_bending Phi_tension Phi_compression (Tied) Phi_compression (Spiral) Phi_shear Input Data Technical Note 23 .©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES. Load combination scale factor. BERKELEY. See Technical Note 8.1 . Shear strength reduction factor. Load type: dead. Tensile strength reduction factor. Compressive strength reduction factor for reinforced columns. other. earthquake. wind. CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN ACI318-99 Technical Note 23 Input Data This Technical Note describes the concrete frame design input data for ACI318-99. superimposed dead.

other. Concrete. Minimum clear concrete cover. other. Area of individual reinforcing bar to be used. Isotropic or orthotropic. steel. Technical Note 23 . Material Property Data Material Name Material Type Design Type Modulus of Elasticity Poisson's Ratio Thermal Coeff Shear Modulus Coefficient of thermal expansion. Label applied to section. Material Property Mass and Weight Material Name Mass Per Unit Vol Weight Per Unit Vol Material Name Lightweight Concrete Concrete FC Rebar FY Rebar FYS Lightwt Reduc Fact Concrete compressive strength. Shear strength reduction factor for light weight concrete. Shear reinforcing steel yield strength.2 Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Input Data .0. Concrete. default = 1. Material label. Used to calculate self-mass of structure. steel. other. Used to calculate self-weight of structure. Material Design Data for Concrete Materials Concrete Column Property Data Section Label Mat Label Column Depth Column Width Rebar Pattern Concrete Cover Bar Area Layout of main flexural reinforcing steel. Bending reinforcing steel yield strength. steel.Input Data Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Input Data COLUMN HEADING DESCRIPTION Concrete.

0. Use the File menu > Print Setup command and the Setup>> button to change printers. Concrete Column Design Element Information Concrete Beam Design Element Information Using the Print Design Tables Form To print concrete frame design input data directly to a printer. Effective length factor. Unbraced length about minor axis.Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 Input Data Table 1 Concrete Frame Design Input Data COLUMN HEADING Story ID Column Line Section ID Framing Type RLLF Factor L_Ratio Major L_Ratio Minor K Major K Minor Story ID Bay ID Section ID Framing type RLLF Factor L_Ratio Major L_Ratio Minor Unbraced length about major axis. Unbraced length about major axis. Effective length factor. default = 1. default = 1. Lateral or gravity. Grid lines locating beam.0. Click the Cancel button rather than the OK button to cancel the print. Name of section assigned to column.3 . Grid line. click the Print to File check box on the Print Design Tables form. Story level at which beam occurs. Lateral or gravity. Click the Filename>> button to change Using the Print Design Tables Form Technical Note 23 . if necessary. Click the OK button to send the print to your printer. Section number assigned to beam. use the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design command and click the check box on the Print Design Tables form. DESCRIPTION Column assigned to story level at top of column. To print concrete frame design input data to a file. Unbraced length about minor axis.

g. Technical Note 23 . . Click the OK buttons on the Open File for Printing Tables form and the Print Design Tables form to complete the request.xls. The print will be for the selected beam(s) only.Input Data Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 the path or filename. Note: The File menu > Display Input/Output Text Files command is useful for displaying output that is printed to a text file. If you select a specific frame element(s) before using the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design command. Data will be added to this file. click Yes to replace the existing file.doc). Use the appropriate file extension for the desired format (e. The Append check box allows you to add data to an existing file. The path and filename of the current file is displayed in the box near the bottom of the Print Design Tables form. the Selection Only check box will be checked.4 Using the Print Design Tables Form .. Or use the Filename>> button to locate another file. . . and when the Open File for Printing Tables caution box appears.txt.

1 . Shear reinforcing required. The column headings for output data and a description of what is included in the columns of the tables are provided in Table 1 of this Technical Note. The design output is printed when you click the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design command and select Output Summary on the Print Design Tables form. Load combination for which the reinforcing is designed. Name of section assigned to column. CALIFORNIA DECEMBER 2001 CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN ACI318-99 Technical Note 24 Output Details This Technical Note describes the concrete frame design output for ACI318-99 that can be printed to a printer or to a text file. BERKELEY. Table 1 Concrete Column Design Output Technical Note 24 . Table 1 Concrete Column Design Output COLUMN HEADING Story ID Column Line Section ID Station ID DESCRIPTION Column assigned to story level at top of column. Biaxial P-M Interaction and Shear Design of Column-Type Elements Required Reinforcing Longitudinal Combo Shear22 Combo Shear33 Area of longitudinal reinforcing required.©COMPUTERS AND STRUCTURES. Load combination for which the reinforcing is designed.. Grid lines. Shear reinforcing required. INC. The program provides the output data in a series of tables. Further information about using the Print Design Tables form is presented at the end of this Technical Note.

Grid line. Minor Combo Technical Note 24 . Beam-Column Capacity Ratios Major Combo Ratio of beam moment capacity to column capacity.Output Details Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 Table 1 Concrete Column Design Output COLUMN HEADING Combo DESCRIPTION Load combination for which the reinforcing is designed. Load combination upon which the ratio of factored load versus allowed capacity is based. Minor Combo Joint Shear Capacity Ratios Major Combo Ratio of factored load versus allowed capacity. Load combination upon which the ratio of factored load versus allowed capacity is based. Load combination upon which the ratio of beam moment capacity to column capacity is based.2 Table 2 Concrete Column Joint Output . Ratio of beam moment capacity to column capacity. Table 2 Concrete Column Joint Output COLUMN HEADING DESCRIPTION Beam to Column Capacity Ratios and Joint Shear Capacity Check Story ID Column Line Section ID Story level at which joint occurs. Load combination upon which the ratio of beam moment capacity to column capacity is based. Ratio of factored load versus allowed capacity. Assigned section name.

.txt. Use the File menu > Print Setup command and the Setup>> button to change printers. Using the Print Design Tables Form Technical Note 24 . The path and filename of the current file is displayed in the box near the bottom of the Print Design Tables form. Data will be added to this file. Click the Filename>> button to change the path or filename. the Selection Only check box will be checked. click Yes to replace the existing file. Or use the Filename>> button to locate another file. Click the Cancel button rather than the OK button to cancel the print. if necessary.Concrete Frame Design ACI318-99 Output Details Using the Print Design Tables Form To print concrete frame design input data directly to a printer. . The Append check box allows you to add data to an existing file.doc). If you select a specific frame element(s) before using the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design command. To print concrete frame design input data to a file.g.3 . Note: The File menu > Display Input/Output Text Files command is useful for displaying output that is printed to a text file.xls. click the Print to File check box on the Print Design Tables form. .. and when the Open File for Printing Tables caution box appears. Use the appropriate file extension for the desired format (e. The print will be for the selected beam(s) only. Click the OK buttons on the Open File for Printing Tables form and the Print Design Tables form to complete the request. Click the OK button to send the print to your printer. use the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame Design command and click the check box on the Print Design Tables form.

- Etabs Concrete Design (1)
- ETABS Tutorial With NBCCResponse Spectrum Case
- Etabs Manual
- ETABS-Oct12
- EtTutor
- Etabs Shear Wall Design Manual UBC 97
- ETABS 2015 Manual by Civilax.com for Concrete Frame Design
- ETABS-Example-RC Building Seismic Load _Time History
- ETABS Example
- ETABS User's Manual
- ETabs Manual
- Etabs Design of Tall Building Reinforcement Detailing
- Etabs-MAN-005
- ETABS Examples Manual
- ACI Method of Mix Design (Civilax.com)
- 2D&3D International Plaxis Course
- ETABS-Example-RC Building _Equivalent Special Seismic
- ETABS Exmple1
- Modeling cracked behavior of shear walls in ETABS.docx
- ETABS Composite Floor Frame Design Manual
- E TABS
- Etabs Software Verification
- Etabs Tutorial Wall
- Etabs Steel Design[1]
- Isolated Footing
- Amplification of Accidental Torsion in Etabs
- ETABS-Example-RC Building With Shear Wall
- Analysis & Design Using ETABS
- RCC62 Retaining Wall
- ACI 318-08-Frame Design

- Comparative study on RCC and Steel-Concrete Composite Building using Linear Static Analysis
- As 3572.8-2002 Plastics - Glass Filament Reinforced Plastics (GRP) - Methods of Test Determination of Long Te
- As 3600-2009 Concrete Structures
- Design of handling system for heavy rocket motor segments
- Mockingbird Pedestrian Bridge presentation
- The Mechanical Properties of WoodIncluding a Discussion of the Factors Affecting the MechanicalProperties, and Methods of Timber Testing by Record, Samuel J.
- Flexural Behaviour of Concrete Encased Cold Formed Steel Channel Section
- Investigation On Behavior of Cold Formed Steel in Beam Column Connections
- Study on Seismic Analysis of RCC and Steel-Concrete Composite Structure and Cost Comparison with different support conditions
- Design and Analysis of Reinforced Concrete Shells
- Prestressed Concrete Design of Flexural Member
- Weight Optimization of Composite Beams by Finite Element Method
- A Study on Strength and Behaviour of Exterior Beam-Column Joint by using SCC and SFRSCC
- Flexural Behaviour of Sifcon Fibres in Reinforced Concrete Beams
- Investigation of Web Perforation in Steel I-Beams
- April 2013 MWD Power Point
- As 5100.6-2004 Bridge Design Steel and Composite Construction
- tmp55E6.tmp
- tmp37BD.tmp
- Design & Analysis of High rise Building With & Without Floating Column Using Etabs
- Richmond Screw Anchor Co. v. United States, 275 U.S. 331 (1928)
- Childs Point Road Fire Report
- Victor E. Baum v. Jones & Laughlin Supply Co., and Cabot Shops, Inc., 233 F.2d 865, 10th Cir. (1956)
- HB 48-1999 Steel Structures Design Handbook
- Finite Element Modeling of Push-Out Test for Embossed Steel Plate Connector
- Experimental Study on Flexural Behaviour of Steel-Concrete Composite Beam using Epoxy Adhesive Bonding
- Structural Behaviour of Bubble Deck Slabs and Its Application
- Experimental behaviour on study of sandwich beams
- Comparative Study between Precast and Cast In-Situ Structure Under Combination of Dynamic Loads and Connections between Precast Elements
- Design of Variable Stiffness and Variable Damping Vibration Absorber

- curs09_dsis Dinamica structurilor şi inginerie seismică
- curs08_dsis Dinamica structurilor şi inginerie seismică
- curs10_dsis Dinamica structurilor şi inginerie seismică
- ghidul-tanarului-intreprinzator
- curs14_dsis Dinamica structurilor şi inginerie seismică
- curs12_dsis Dinamica structurilor şi inginerie seismică
- curs13Gdsis Dinamica structurilor şi inginerie seismică
- Cotarea in Autocad
- Sap Basic
- curs07_dsis Dinamica structurilor şi inginerie seismică
- curs11_dsis Dinamica structurilor şi inginerie seismică
- 59925797 c133 Imbinari Cu Suruburi de Inalta Rezistenta
- CA Rezultat Al Crizei Energetice Din Anii
- 52837832 Stabilirea Si Prevenirea Cauzelor de Incendii
- lemn vio1
- curs01_dsis Dinamica structurilor şi inginerie seismică
- Tutorial Etabs
- Welcome to ETABS
- Etabs-MAN-007
- Curs rezistenta materialelor
- curs02_dsis Dinamica structurilor şi inginerie seismică
- Software Verification Etabs
- Etabs-MAN-008
- curs06_dsis Dinamica structurilor şi inginerie seismică
- curs05_dsis Dinamica structurilor şi inginerie seismică
- curs04_dsis Dinamica structurilor şi inginerie seismică
- curs03_dsis Dinamica structurilor şi inginerie seismică
- Etabs-TUT-001
- Introductory Guide Etabs
- p100-1-2006

Sign up to vote on this title

UsefulNot usefulClose Dialog## Are you sure?

This action might not be possible to undo. Are you sure you want to continue?

Close Dialog## This title now requires a credit

Use one of your book credits to continue reading from where you left off, or restart the preview.

Loading